Home

Suzuki Master Book.book

1. ECM TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR 37 A C CONTROL A C control relay circuit short RELAY CKT MALF SHORT CIRCUIT 38 MALF INDICATOR MIL circuit open LAMP CKT MALF OPEN CIRCUIT 38 MALF INDICATOR MIL circuit short LAMP CKT MALF SHORT CIRCUIT 39 GLOW PLUG Glow plug lamp circuit open LAMP CKT MALF OPEN CIRCUIT 39 GLOW PLUG Glow plug lamp circuit short LAMP CKT MALF SHORT CIRCUIT 41 IGNITION SIGNAL Ignition signal not received by the ECM FAIL Ignition system problem 42 CMP SENSOR Camshaft Position sensor signal not received by the NO SIGNAL ECM or PCM CMP sensor or circuit failure 42 CKP SENSOR Crankshaft Position sensor signal not received by NO SIGNAL the ECM or PCM CKP sensor or circuit failure 43 KNOCK SENSOR Knock Sensor failure or circuit open OR CIRCUIT OPEN 43 KNOCK SENSOR Knock Sensor failure or circuit short OR CIRCUIT SHORT 44 CTP SWITCH CTP Switch failure or circuit open OR CIRCUIT OPEN 45 CTP SWITCH CTP Switch failure or circuit short OR CIRCUIT SHORT 46 ISC SYSTEM FAIL Idle Speed Control system failure 47 CMP SENSOR Camshaft Position sensor signal not received by the NO SIGNAL ECM or PCM CMP sensor or circuit failure 51 EGR SYSTEM FAIL Exhaust gas recirculation system malfunction 51 EGR SYSTEM FAIL Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor or EGRT SENS SHORT circuit short 51 EGR SYSTEM F
2. RB series 21 X 22 X RG413 23 X 42 X MRF series RF series 27 X MG413W SJ413W 27 X 51413 33 X SN413 17 X 32 X 41 X GA413 19 X 35 X MT308 ST308 28 X RH413 416 34 x 47 X NORTH AMERICAN MARKET 1991 1995 MODEL ECU NO SUZUKI MODE EURO MODE SE416 1 x 3 X SF series 4 X 5 X SW series 5 X SY series 5 X Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 98 4 Selecting the Vehicle ECM OBD 1 Application SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECT MODE F0 EURO MODE F1 SUZUKI MODE SELECT VEHICLE Ay F0 VITARA X 90 5 416 52416 F1 ALTO 9410 SELECT F2 BALENO DIESEL SY419 F3 OTHER SELECT SYSTEM TBI Throttle Body Injection YES NO i33 GD SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S SELECT MODE F4 MISC TESTS SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS SELECT TRANS SELECT TRANS SELECT TRANS F0 MT F1 AT F0 MT 4AT F1 3AT FO MT AT ECM F1 AT PCM SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 ECU ID ECU ID option not available for all vehicles SELECT TRANS menus not available for all vehicles Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 99 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES Press
3. 221 CATEGORY DESCRIPTIONS usse EURE UR E ERE S dub dd oed 221 DBSCRIPTOR FORMAT ded da 222 TRANSMISSION ciuaertbnribrskhtekeeb9 ReneEitebsRnsbeEebritskesdy da 224 PREIS PUPILS Loaded da id desta Pe Ades ded de dE Rd 224 Elecitical Parameters ERA ERO UU OR RC UU CEA EORR RES 225 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC vi E E TG OOUT PRISON Sons qesesd sd dcradue do eine ado ic 225 bikes E Y et de eto Jo EORR Yol ede oU ob we br whe eos 226 Generol 6 ak Pad dd MASSAGE DRE RR Edd RAE dd ded qae ERA 226 PROC Neu eo wer eed eaa da qu ede Ru ERE Fave aded hed 226 Miscellaneous Parameters 2 ERA RE dq Rd RS 227 ied dod did RIED 227 bor pct b E AO EORR e CE CA CRURA RAM HS 227 PUR bade We dede dp Ree acon mal qv RR Gab dd 229 A IF YOURE HAVING A PROBLEM 230 PLANKE SCREEN o6 434634 nc0n Rd ieee dites eie dd 230 DISPLAYS SOLIDBARS EREDRGWRPPERRETCIQRTIQUERTUPPRDIURRERUPRRRDC RSS 231 MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING 231 KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM SPORADICALLY RETURNS TES PISTE PAGI 46 chap tiei pEEDERETO EIE a E EEEED EE D pP REI Lees 232 TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA
4. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 57 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F3 CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION The Clear Diagnostic Information mode is used to clear DTCs from the vehicle s ECM along with any other diagnostic information which the controller has saved When you select Clear Info you are first prompted with a warning message This is to prevent accidental clearing of codes If you press in response to the prompt the tester will clear all emissions related information The Clear Info mode will clear the following information from the vehicle s ECM e Clears number of diagnostic trouble codes e Clears all diagnostic trouble codes e Clears diagnostic trouble code for Freeze Frame data Clears Freeze Frame data e Clears oxygen sensor test data Resets status of system monitoring tests Readiness Tests Clears on board monitoring test results pending DTCs Clear All Diagnostic Info YES Continue NO Quit ACTIVE KEYS YES Clears all emission related information o Returns to Select Mode menu without clearing information Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 58 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F4 OXYGEN SENSOR MONITORING TEST RESULTS The F4 OXYGEN SENSOR MONITORING TEST RESULTS MODE is only available for 1996 97 vehicles The Oxygen Sensor O2S Monitoring Test Results mode displays
5. Terminate the Print Data mode and return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 258 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application Print Sample SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION TYPE AIRBAG VIN 123456 TECH 1 DATA LIST DESCRIPTION WARNING LAMP IGNITION VOLTAGE DRIVER VOLT PASSENGER VOLT MODE F1 DTC HISTORY The DTC History mode is only available when testing the ABS system NOTE DTC History is not available on ABS DBC7 systems DTC History is a feature that provides you with additional fault information for the purpose of increasing serviceability This information when used in conjunction with standard diagnostic procedures can reduce the time you spend trying to locate the cause of intermittent faults by identifying the degree of intermittence Highly intermittent rarely occurring faults are difficult to recreate and therefore are usually diagnosed differently from frequent or current faults DTC History identifies the following information Two pages of information are displayed for each of the first five failures and five pages of information are displayed for the last failure FIRST FIVE OR FEWER FAILURES The first five faults are displayed in the order in which they occurred This information can be used to identify situations where an initial fault that was detected no longer remains but the fault conditions explain the occu
6. DTC S NOT CLEARED CLEARING DTC S DTC S CLEARED Vehicles without a Trouble Info Menu 3 The DTC s will be continuously displayed wrapping around to the first code automatically after the last code has been displayed DTC display screens will appear in one of the following formats DTC PXXXX C THE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION CODE XX THE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION CURRENT CODE XX THE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION In each case the status indication of the DTC will be displayed as follows Cor Current HorHistory Por Pending Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 111 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application CLEAR CODES PHASE 4 To clear all stored DTC s press Guias to go to Clear Codes Phase When the tester displays EXECUTE CLEAR DTC S select either for clearing DTC s or for not clearing them When is pressed tester will display a CLEARING DTC S message followed by either a DTC S CLEARED or a DTC S NOT CLEARED message After a few seconds the tester will automatically start displaying DTC s again If no DTC s are present at this time NO DTC S screen is displayed When QI 9 is pressed the DTC s are retained in the ECM or PCM and the tester will start displaying DTC s again 5 Pressing 24 will terminate the DTC s mode returning you to the select mode menu Vehicles with a Trouble Info Menu To sele
7. DLC Cable B Tech 1A 16 14 Pin Type 3 Adapter Cable Application Cartridge FIGURE 2 2 Tech 1A Adapter and Cables Using the 16 Pin DLC Type 3 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 6 2 Getting Started II Application DLC Cable ater 14 12 Pin VIM Adapter Application Cartridge 16 24 Pin VIM Adapter Cable FIGURE 2 3 Tech 1 Adapter and Cables Before operating the SUZUKI ECM OBD II Application with the TECH 1A the following steps must be performed 1 Insert the SUZUKI ECM OBD II Application cartridge into the bottom slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 or into the back slot of the MTS 3100 Verify that no other application cartridge e g SUZUKI 91 94 Cartridge is installed in the top slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 If you are using a TECH 1 tester and intend to connect it to a peripheral device such as a printer or terminal install the RS232C Cartridge in the top cartridge slot The RS232C Cartridge is not required 1f you are using a TECH 1 Series A tester 2 Connect the Data Link Connector DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 7 2 Getting Started ECM II Application 3 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 4 Locate the vehicle s serial Data Link Connector DLC The vehicle DLC is usually under the dash on the driver s side Refer to the vehicle service manual if you are in doubt 5 Con
8. RE ORA 232 DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF 233 COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING sese 233 PB DL 235 ABS AIRBAG APPLICATION 1 SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG APPLICATION DESCRIPTION 238 HOW THE SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE VETRONIX THE oio e irpo Ed b EE MEE E Fide bbb EO 239 iolsxgexsigbee ese dobq ek 241 SELTING UP THE TESTER cues acdc Rind bode RNa p dee dena EX 241 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 246 CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE TESTER WHILE THE IGNITION KEY IS ee hee d dol be cen qol de db 246 REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED 246 REMOVING OR CHANGING MASTER CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA NGAGE RT ER ehe 247 o SELECTING THE SYSTEM we ores soe oes oe heed 248 SELECTING THE ABS TYPE dc REDE RR b P RR 249 SELECTING THE MODEL 249 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC vii SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR i osses esa eoa Rs 249 SELECT MODE MENU Lirir eide4b eleR GARE GRARERRRPAPex E RRRAEIEES 250 SELECT MODE MENU FOR ABS DBUT 251 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES 252 SELECTING THE TEST 252
9. a oe oe eee eee vid 252 TEST MODES DESCRIPTIONS 253 MISCELLANEOUS TESTS AVAILABLE 253 Mpeg usur Tens nirt Eki 254 MODE FO DATA LIST 255 Cresta Jour Data Fairs Ar Abhi r EA 256 Data List Paramell fs te toga ek enum esq eaa Usadas Ka EATER DOR de 257 MODE Fi PRINT DATA pE EEE E 258 Print Dala SO Series Airbag Only xo Kod ERROR deacon 258 MODE DIC HISTORY HE RAN ERR RA d d 259 Falme hd eh Ane RE dd npe be 259 IUS GOS p pado Pd ied dhe bU Rod Edo Aa du aede 260 TNC c rect 260 NROJDEPRZ DICOSVDICINEO RP EY RP RE REPE 262 MODE F3 ABS SNAPSHOT OR IRR RH UR Une TR 266 REPEDE Shae bh dh DAM he bie iid pd Per ede ADI RATER A 266 TACO COMMON So hs eA A ea eae anda dd de 266 Vigne Cond DAR cde bid bel eU deh HERR ERES epo Osa tes 267 PED COMA EB deed shard 6 hed teak id gg 268 rro sr arc e T TIT PETERS bie bee 268 IEEE hice dh coca Aedes eld ed qr iac iaa Ra bala gra t addu iw dn du 270 Ilo IMDB PRES geh eee E PEE HE EH bee
10. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 152 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application SPARK ADVANCE SWITCH STATES This parameter indicates whether or not the test switch terminal on the monitor coupler circuit is grounded ON Test switch terminal on the monitor coupler circuit is grounded OFF Test switch terminal on the monitor coupler circuit is not grounded While communication with the tester is active the IGNITION ADVANCE is not fixed even if the test switch terminal on the monitor coupler circuit is grounded The tester indicates the test switch terminal on the monitor coupler circuit condition only FUEL DELIVERY PARAMETERS AIR FLOW l min The Air Flow sensor measures the rate of volume air flow into the intake manifold in liters minute BAROMETRIC PRESSURE inHg KPa mmHg This parameter represents a measurement of barometric air pressure and is used for altitude correction of the fuel injection quantity and IAC valve control BAROMETRIC SENSOR VOLTAGE This parameter represents a measurement of barometric air pressure and is used for altitude correction of the fuel injection quantity EGR THROTTLE UNITS EGR throttle value indicates the opening duty of the valve FUEL CUT ON OFF This parameter reflects the ON OFF status of the deceleration program in the ECM The signal will be ON whenever deceleration fuel cut is commanded as a result
11. in the left column of the second line of the display as shown in Figure A Pressing causes the bottom display parameter to be fixed as shown in Figure B To unfix the top parameter press ai Press Ca to unfix the bottom parameter The tester won t allow both the top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with FRONT WHEEL SPEED and VEHICLE SPEED To do so scroll through the preprogrammed pairs with the or key until you find a pair with FRONT WHEEL SPEED Fix FRONT WHEEL SPEED by pressing since it is the top parameter Then scroll the other half of the display with the or Qe key until VEHICLE SPEED is displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 256 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application FIXES TOP PARAMETER FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS 55 56 MPH Figure A DATA LIST PARAMETERS VEHICLE SPEED 55 MPH ABS WARNING LAMP OFF FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER Figure B Some Data List parameters are discrete parameters they can only have two or three values and their units are the descriptors for the states they can have For example the ABS RELAY CMD is either ON or OFF ACTIVE KEYS 33 GD Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark the top display parameters as fixed or cancel the bottom display parameters as fixed
12. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 138 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application Press to select READINESS TST from the MISC TEST menu MISC TEST F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 READINESS TST The first three items on the Readiness Test display indicate the vehicle s monitoring capability for continuously monitoring systems Misfire Monitoring Fuel System Monitoring Comprehensive Component Monitoring These are indicated as either being SUPPORTED or NOT SUPPORTED depending on the vehicle s ECM The other display items indicate the status of the tests These tests can be COMPLETE INCOMPLETE or NOT SUPPORTED Press the key to advance the screen and the key to return to the previous screen when viewing these tests MISC TEST MISFIRE SUPPORT EVAP SYS COMPLET F0 OUTPUT TESTS FUEL SYS NOT SUP O2 SENS INCOMPL F1 READINESS TST COMPRHE NOT SUP O2S HEAT NOT SUP CATALYST COMPLET EGRSYS COMPLET ACTIVE KEYS FOR READINESS TESTS D Selection keys MODE F5 ECU ID ECU ID mode is NOT available for all vehicles The ECU ID mode allows you to view the ECU identification number as well as the Software Version number Select the ECU ID mode from the Select Mode menu by pressing SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 ECU ID The tester will display the following screen Suzuki Afterm
13. 110 Diagnostic Trouble Codes Description isses eese ARRA 110 SNAPSHOT deeds 115 SEED caidas cua 115 euis COPUNCR DEM deed 115 PRUNE DUG os hoe hos Read ibd db 116 MODE ER MISE TESIS 122 Mise Toos Mode Abort a oc cud dace ware qct din b Poe ad dos dos dace 122 Selecting Miscellaneous TOt 124 QUUD EON big tas habbo ded d dead 124 PROG Pak Mode dab qubd Oe GOERS 126 PIDE NE EEEE qi cede ash adh EE Oe Sur Qe eas 127 CORWOP arter LIRA ARG LARA DEDEDE Re CR Ra RR am di 128 Stepping EGR COMM _ Loose robar dah dale dialed died Aad PEOR HER 129 BO ION LINE dad PI deed aa dose baa Raed 131 CUm Pure JO PEEV TIEN x ches tks ss wach RU tate dicas Planes cae d CR CC e es 132 Cast Pure Fat Gol TOE 246255285480 uk aXX LARA RU 133 IU PG dd diodes ein dali dis do dodi dole ordi d deh ee dg dad 134 apa pa HOO OI HER OP Bad rei dido danda ed pode Qa apiid
14. Driver or passenger airbag initiator circuit short to ground SHORT TO GROUND 24 or B1024 DRV AIRBAG INI Driver airbag initiator circuit short to ground SHORT TO GROUND 25 DRV OR PSG Driver or passenger airbag initiator circuit short to battery SHORT TO BATTERY voltage 25 or B1025 DRV AIRBAG INI Driver airbag initiator circuit short to battery SHORT TO BATTERY 31 IGNITION VOLTAGE Ignition voltage is too high TOO HIGH B1031 POWER SUPPLY Power supply voltage to SDM is too high VOLTAGE TOO HIGH 32 IGNITION VOLTAGE Ignition voltage is too low TOO LOW B1032 POWER SUPPLY Power supply voltage to SDM VOLTAGE TOO LOW is too low 35 CRASH SENSOR OR External crash sensor circuit short to ground or battery voltage CIRCUIT FAIL or circuit open B1035 FRONT G SNSR Front G sensor right side circuit is open or shorted to power OPEN RIGHT supply circuit 36 CRASH SENSOR FAIL A failure condition is detected in the external crash sensor or circuit B1036 FRONT G SNSR Front G sensor right side circuit is short to ground SHORT RIGHT 37 LOW PRES SENSOR Low pressure sensor circuit short to ground or battery voltage or CIRCUIT SHORT short in wiring B1037 FRONT G SNSR Front G sensor left side is open or shorted to ground OPEN LEFT 38 LOW PRES SENSOR Low pressure sensor open faulty inflator or circuit open CIRCUIT OPEN B1038 FRONT G SNSR Front G sensor left side circuit is shorted to ground SHORT LEFT 41
15. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 24 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application 8 The Data Display phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data to be displayed by using the and keys 9 Use the and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if not enough time was allowed for data capture before or after the trigger You can advance directly to the first last or trigger sample with the press of a button Display first earliest sample Display trigger sample 0 Display last most recent sample More Data Samples before the trigger Data Sample that occured COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F ERI INTAKE AIR TEMP occured 40 C 104 F More Data Samples COOLANT TEMP DESIRED IDLE M Trigger 40 C 104 F 797 RPM Data Position INTAKE AIR TEMP IDLE SWITCH Pa a ters 40 C 104 F ON rameter Data Sample COOLANT TEMP More Data Samples that occured 40 C 104 F just after INTAKE AIR TEMP the trigger 40 C 104 F 1 occured More Data Samples after the trigger Suzuki Aftermarket Applicatio
16. DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF INJ PULSE WIDTH INJ PULSE WIDTH 40 MSEC ENGINE SPEED ENGINE SPEED 900 RPM Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes e Serial data link cable connector pins loose or corroded e or PCM serial data link connector cable problems Intermittent ECM or PCM problem Recommendations e Verify a good serial data link cable connection Cycle power to the tester COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING COMMPANION APPLICATION MISSING Most Likely Cause ECM Application is not installed in the Application Cartridge Other Possible Causes Application Cartridge is not installed correctly Wrong cartridge is installed in the tester Recommendations Confirm that the Suzuki Application Cartridge is correctly installed in the bottom cartridge slot of the tester Confirm that no other Master or Mass Storage Cartridge is installed in the top cartridge slot Contact your tester distributor to have the application installed in the cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 170 B UNDERSTANDING SUZUKI ECMS The serial data link uses message oriented transmissions with a UART type data format The communication is via a single wire half duplex bus using a master slave protocol The serial data link can be used for communications during normal operation or as an interface to a test device for diagnostic operations I
17. Snapshot Replay Once you have captured Snapshot data you can examine it by pressing the amp and keys to scroll through the samples The last Snapshot is retained in the tester unless You can review the captured Snapshot without vehicle communications by selecting F1 Replay Snapshot It is overwritten by a new Snapshot Suzuki Mode is selected from the start up menu A new application cartridge is installed in the tester The tester is unplugged from power for more than 24 hours Data from the following screen When the REPLAY DATA mode is first entered the tester displays information about the saved Snapshot NOTE This menu option is only displayed if a Snapshot has been taken A Snapshot can also be replayed after communications is established by selecting F3 REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT MENU F0 OBD II Functions F1 Replay Snap Shot Data The Snapshot s trigger point Beginning Center or End and trigger type Manual Any DTC or Single Suzuki Aftermarket Application ECM OBD II Application Page 54 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application DTC are displayed briefly before the Snapshot data is displayed When replaying a saved Snapshot the sample at the time of the trigger sample number 0 at time 0 0 seconds is initially displayed Samples before and or after the trigger can be viewed by pressing the and keys to scroll through the samples SNAP
18. To operate the EGR SOL Valve mode do the following 1 2 3 4 Press or to position the on the display menu next to EGR SOL VAL then press Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Misc Test menu Set the parking brake and block the wheels Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys EGR is displayed at the end of line two and ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve control will be terminated Vehicle speed detected Engine speed less greater than 3000 RPM e Coolant temperature is below 80 The test begins with the EGR solenoid vacuum valve on To control the EGR solenoid vacuum valve off press the key To control EGR solenoid vacuum valve on again press the key The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EGR solenoid vacuum valve is being controlled 6 Press 3A to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return EGR solenoid vacuum valve control to the ECM Operation of t
19. a z amp SS ZO Z gt p zz lt lt lt 1999 SQ x x x x SERIES 1999 SY418 x x x x x x x 2000 2001 x x x 2001 JA627 x x x x x x x x NOTE Regarding MY 2001 SY418 TANK PRESS VAL is indicated on the output tests screen but disregard this item because MY 2001 SY418 is not equipped with the tank pressure control solenoid valve Descriptions of the following output tests are provided in Mode F4 Misc Tests on page 27 RPM CONTROL FIXED SPARK CANI AIR VAL TANK PRESS VAL CANI PURGE VAL STEP EGR FUEL PUMP CONT IAC CAL The following pages give a description of the MIL CONTROL output test and the A C COND FAN output test Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 67 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM II Application MIL CONTROL The purpose of MIL CONT mode is to diagnose the malfunction indicator light and its circuit This mode allows you to control the MIL ON or OFF To operate the MIL CONT mode do the following 1 Press amp or to position the on the display menu next to MIL CONTROL then press GMB 2 Set the parking brake and block the wheels 3 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the MIL is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys
20. Coolant Temperature less than 80 C 21 23 25 29 38 Al 43 46 Stepping EGR Control Engine Speed greater than 3000 RPM DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected 21 38 46 48 Cani Purge Valve Engine speed detected DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected 21 23 25 29 38 46 Fuel Pump Control Engine speed detected DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Fuel tank less than 15 21 25 29 38 46 MIL Control Vehicle speed detected 24 25 29 30 32 34 36 38 47 A C Condenser Fan CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature greater than 110 C A C Switch ON 21 23 29 31 34 36 42 46 48 Radiator Fan Control CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature greater than 110 C A C Switch ON Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 123 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECTING A MISCELLANEOUS TEST Selection of a Miscellaneous Test or Output Control Test may vary from vehicle to vehicle Some vehicles will allow you to choose between an Output Control Test and a Readiness Test from the MISC TEST menu MISC TEST F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 READINESS TST From this display press ay to view the Output Control Test menu For a description of the READINESS TST see Readiness Test on page 138
21. For some vehicles the tester will display a menu of output tests immediately after you press F4 MISC TEST from the SELECT MODE menu The Miscellaneous Test or Output Control Test menu allows you to choose the control test you wish to perform on the vehicle MISC TEST F0 RPM CONTROL OUTPUT TESTS Y OR RPM CONTROL F1 FIXED SPARK F2 IAC CAL FIXED SPARK IAC CAL To select a control test from the MISC TEST menu press the tester key to the left of the test name From the OUTPUT TESTS menu you can select the individual tests by using and to scroll through the list of tests until the is next to the test you want to perform then press 19 9 Detailed descriptions of the individual output control tests start on the following pages Press qyp to return to the SELECT MODE menu from the MISC TEST menu ACTIVE KEYS G Selection Keys Scroll through menu Selection Key Return to Select Mode menu RPM CONTROL RPM Control is not an engine test but it allows you to control the RPM If an elevated RPM or diagnosis of the IAC valve is required for any reason this mode allows quick and easy control of the RPM from any area of the vehicle Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 124 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application CAUTION This test should only be run with the parking brake on and the wheels adequately secured Any other mode of operation i
22. Millivolts 1000ths of a volt Keys 0 1 9 which are used to enter numeric values such as trouble codes These keys double as function keys 0 9 Park Neutral Switch A piece of information which is displayed by the tester Passenger Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 307 B Glossary Of Terms ABS Airbag Application PRESS PRNDL PROM PSI REL REL RF RLY RR SDL SHRT Snapshot Test SOL SW TCS Trouble Codes TST TT VDIF VSS WHL WSS Pressure Transmission shifter indicator Park Reverse Neutral Drive and Low Programmable Read Only Memory Pounds per square inch Rear Axle Relay Release when used with solenoid Right Front Relay Right Rear Serial Data Link Short Tester operating mode which is used to isolate intermittent problems Solenoid Switch Traction Control System Same as Diagnostic Trouble Codes Set by the ABS or SIR to indicate the occurrence of abnormal conditions Test Telltales Indicator lights Volts Voltage Difference Vehicle Speed Sensor Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 308
23. keypress PRESS TO START THE GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE ENTER GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE COMPLETED IMPORTANT IGNITION MUST BE TURNED OFF BEFORE EXITING When key is turned OFF IGNITION OFF REMOVE MODULATOR PRESS EXIT TO RETURN TO MENU ACTIVE KEYS F5 Select Gear Tension test Scroll to the next page of instructions Start the Gear Tension Relief sequence Return to the Select Test menu SUBMODE F6 RELAY TEST The Relay test controls the enable relay while displaying the switched battery voltage into the ABS Controller This tests allows verification of relay operation and also displays Command Relay On or Off Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 285 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application To run the Relay Test do the following 1 Press to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See Important on page 253 2 For AWD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press to select the Relay Test 4 The tester display will confirm that you are in the Relay test The display will automatically scroll after 4 seconds or after pressing key 5 The tester will display the keys used to control the relay the status of the relay whether it is commanded OFF or ON and the current battery voltage as seen by the ABS controller 6 Use the key to turn the relay
24. Camshaft Position Control Condition Control Control Closed Throttle Position Degree Diagnostic Data Link Connector SDL connector Diagnostic Trouble Code ECM ECT EFI EFFI EGR EGRT EVAP FCC FT FXS g sec gs IAC IAT in Hg INJ ISC KPa KPa A KPH Engine Control Module Engine Coolant Temperature Electronic Fuel Injection Efficiency Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Evaporative Emission Federal Communications Commission Fuel Trim Fixed Spark Mode Grams Per Second Grams Per Second Idle Air Control Intake Air Temperature Inches of Mercury Injector Idle Speed Control Kilo Pascal Kilo Pascal Absolute Kilometers Per Hour Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 81 B Glossary II Application LH Ibm MAF MANI MANUF MAP MFG MISC MFI mmHg MONIT MPH MPU ms mV O2S OBD II PCM PNP POS PRESS PRG PSP PSSV Valve RDT RH RPM RS232C 81 S2 SDL Left Hand SENS Pounds Per Minute SOL Mass Air Flow SP valve Manifold SPD Manufacturer SYS Manifold Absolute Pressure TEMP Manufacturer TBI Miscellaneous THROT Multiport Fuel Injection Multi Port Fuel Injection MPI TP Millimeters of Mercury UART Monitor VAF Miles Per Hour VAL Micro Processing Unit VIN Millisecond VNT Millivolt VSS Oxygen Sensor On Board Diagnostics Level IT Powertrain Control Module Par
25. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 149 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application IAC Adjust Monitor IAC Duty IAC Flow IAC Flow Duty IAC ISC Duty IAC Motor Position Power Steering Pressure PSP Switch Power Steering Solenoid Vacuum PS SV Valve TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 4WD L Switch D Range Shift Switch Gear Position Gear Position CON MON Input Shaft Inp Shaft Speed Mode Select Switch O D OFF Switch PNP Signal Pressure Regulator Solenoid CON MON Shift Solenoid 1 CON MON Shift Solenoid 2 CON MON TCC Solenoid CON MON Throttle Open Rate Throttle Position Level Trans Range Trans Range VSS A T VSS TRANS MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS ABS Switch A C Condenser Fan A C Control Signal A C Cooling Fan A C Evaporator Temperature A C Magnetic Clutch A C Pressure Switch A C Switch Blower Fan Switch Brake Switch Heater Fan Radiator Fan Starter Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 150 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD I Application GENERAL PARAMETERS CALC LOAD Calc Load is engine load displayed as a percentage Its value is calculated mathematically using the following formula actual current intake air volume maximum possible intake air volume x 100 CHARGING EFFICIENCY Charging efficiency is calculated using data from the mass air flow and camshaft position sensors A higher charging efficiency indicates a larger e
26. Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 65 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application MODE F3 SNAPSHOT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT is identical to the Mode F3 Snapshot on page 22 except for the Trigger Condition section which is described below Trigger Condition The trigger condition defines the specific circumstances under which you want the trigger to be set The possible trigger conditions are ANY DTC If any DTC is detected by the tester it will cause the trigger to be set SINGLE DTC You can select a specific DTC that must be detected before the trigger will be set Step 3 in the Operating Procedure tells you how to enter the code MANUAL TRIGGER While operating the SNAPSHOT mode you can always cause the trigger to be set by pressing the key Once the trigger occurs the tester will retain data according to which trigger point you have selected MODE F4 MISC TESTS When F4 MISC TESTS is selected from the SELECT MODE menu this submenu will appear MISC TEST F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 READINESS TST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 66 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application F0 OUTPUT TESTS F0 OUTPUT TESTS displays sub modes to operate single tests A chart of the tests available is provided below r 32 z z 2 S 5 E T
27. When the tester 1s operating in SNAPSHOT mode it is constantly storing information about data parameters and DTC s A time and position index for the stored information is also saved The tester stores all of the Data List parameters and DTC s for the vehicle selected When the memory is full the oldest earliest data collected 1s erased to make room for new information A TRIGGER tells the tester when to stop collecting data You can specify a TRIGGER CONDITION so the tester collects data that will be most useful in diagnosing the current problem TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition defines the specific circumstances under which you want the trigger to be set The possible trigger conditions are ANY DTC If any DTC is detected by the tester it will cause the trigger to be set SINGLE DTC You can select a specific DTC that must be detected before the trigger will be set Step 3 in the Operating Procedure tells you how to enter the code MANUAL TRIGGER While operating the SNAPSHOT mode you can always cause the trigger to be set by pressing the zl key Once the trigger occurs the tester will retain data according to which trigger point you have selected VIEWING CAPTURED DATA By selecting F3 REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT menu you have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data All data captured during SNAPSHOT will be retained in the tester until it is overwr
28. displayed at the end of line 2 and the MIL Control state of operation ON OFF is displayed at the end of line 4 If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press to return to the Output Tests menu 7 Press again to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Indicates MIL Control monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F MIL DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM OFF MIL Control state Mil Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR MIL CONTROL MODE Select the MIL CONTROL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen Turn on the MIL Control Turn off the MIL Control Terminate the MIL Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu RADIATOR FAN CONTROL Radiator Fan Control mode allows you to turn the radiator fan relay on and off To select Radiator Fan Control in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the RAD FAN CTL test from the Output Tests selection menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake and securely block the wheels of the vehicle 3 Press to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that amp means ON and key means OFF Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 135 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD I Application 5 Press to turn the Radiator Fan ON and to turn the Ra
29. is selected if trouble codes are present the tester automatically displays each trouble code for three seconds 3 The trouble codes are continuously displayed wrapping around to the first code automatically after the last trouble code has been displayed First a listing of all Current trouble codes is displayed followed by History trouble codes Current or History is displayed indicating the type of code Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 199 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE For ECU No 3 made by Siemens AIRBAG SYSTEM VALID DATA TROUBLE CODES PRESENT TROUBLE CODES F0 DISPLAY CODES F1 LAMP CLEAR F2 LOCK CLEAR CODE 25 TCC SOLENOID OPEN CURRENT CODE 25 TCC SOLENOID NO TROUBLE CODES NO CODES EXIT EXIT ENTER EXIT OPEN HISTORY EACH CODE DISPLAYED FOR 3SECONDS CLEAR CODES PHASE EXECUTE CLEAR CODES YES NO CODES CLEARING ENTER o CLEAR CODES CODES NOT CLEARED TURN THE IGN SW OFF THEN ON CODES CLEARED TURN THE IGN SW OFF THEN ON Mes CNN FIGURE 5 3 Trouble Codes Mode Flowchart for A T ABS and Airbag Display Codes some ABS Systems only Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 200 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application CLEAR CODES PHASE
30. key opens the EVAP Canister Purge Valve 8 Press the key to close the EVAP Canister Purge Valve 8 6 Press 24 to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the EVAP Canister Purge Valve control to the ECM Operation of the EVAP Canister Purge valve mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 43 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST Ay CANI AIR VAL TANK PRES VAL CANI PURGE VAL ENTER CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE STOP ENGINE IGNITION ON THEN PRESS ENTER Indicates CANISTER PURGE VALVE mode ENTER CANIST PURGE VAL XXX PRG PURGE TRIM XXX XXX Indicates CANISTER PURGE More Data Pairs VALVE value ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters G9 lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Open EVAP Canister Purge Valve 896 while viewing parameters Close EVAP Canister Purge Valve 8 while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 44 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application RDT FAN CONTROL The purpose of RDT FAN CONT mode is to diagnose th
31. 55 56 FRONT WHL SPEEDS 43MPH 42 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS 42MPH 42 T Waiting for Trigger SNAPSHOT TRIGGER OCCURED ON MANUAL KEY PRESS FRONT WHL SPEEDS 41MPH 41 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS 40MPH 40 0 Trigger Occurred On Display Data Phase FIGURE 5 6 Data Capture Phase ACTIVE KEYS o Scroll through displayed data parameters FO Mark the top displayed parameter as fixed or cancel the bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark the bottom displayed parameter as fixed or cancel the top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between MPH and km h display G Manual trigger ENTER Manual trigger Manual trigger or Display captured data if trigger has already occurred Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 271 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application DATA DISPLAY PHASE 9 The Data Display phase is indicated with a number initially 0 in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data to be displayed by using the keys 10 The current DTCs present during each sample can be displayed by pressing The DTCs automatically scroll once then the display returns to the Data Display list CURRENT displayed at the end of line two in the DTC display indicates the code is a current code History codes are not read during SNA
32. 55 LR SOLENOID FAIL A failure condition is detected in the left rear solenoid 4 CHANNEL ONLY 55 or C1055 LR INLET Monitor voltage of LR inlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree C1055 REAR INLET Monitor voltage of rear inlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 56 REAR SOLENOID FAIL 3 A failure condition is detected in the rear solenoid CHANNEL ONLY 56 or C1056 LR OUTLET Monitor voltage of LR outlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree C1056 REAR OUTLET Monitor voltage of rear outlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 57 or C1057 POWER SUPPLY FAIL The voltage of the power supply has fallen 61 PUMP MOTOR FAIL A failure condition is detected in the pump motor open short Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 217 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application ABS TROUBLE CODES CONTINUED OPEN 3 CHANNEL ONLY ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE C1061 PUMP MOTOR A failure condition is detected in the pump motor relay RELAY FAIL 63 or C1063 FAIL SAFE RELAY FAIL A failure condition is detected in the fail safe relay open short 71 or C1071 ABS CONTROL A failure condition is detected in the ABS control module MODULE FAIL 81 BASE BRAKE OR A failure condition is detected in the Base Brake or the DIFFEREN SW FAIL 3 Differential Switch circuit is open CHANNEL ONLY
33. 82 4WD SIGNAL CIRCUIT 4WD signal circuit open AIRBAG TROUBLE CODES ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE 15 PASSENGER INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit resistances too high or open RES TOO HIGH circuit 15 or B1015 PSG AIRBAG INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit resistances too high or open RES TOO HIGH circuit 16 PASSENGER INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit resistances too low RES TOO LOW 16 or B1016 PSG AIRBAG INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit resistances too low RES TOO LOW 18 or B1018 PSG AIRBAG INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit short to ground SHORT TO GROUND 19 or B1019 PSG AIRBAG INI Passenger airbag initiator circuit short to battery SHORT TO BATTERY 21 DRIVER INITIATOR Driver airbag initiator circuit resistance is too high or open RES TOO HIGH circuit 21 or B1021 DRV AIRBAG INI Driver airbag initiator circuit resistance is too high or open RES TOO HIGH circuit 22 DRIVER INITIATOR Driver airbag initiator circuit resistance is too low RES TOO LOW Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 218 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application AIRBAG TROUBLE CODES CONTINUED ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE 22 or B1022 DRV AIRBAG INI Driver airbag initiator circuit resistance is too low RES TOO LOW 24 DRV OR PSG
34. MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING MALFUNCTIONING 168 KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM SPORADICALLY RETURNS PAGE 224p pb debe ick hee ee tad 169 TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA zciisteirRUCE ERUPDRERUPEREOUCRES C 169 DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF 170 COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING esee 170 B UNDERSTANDING SUZUKI 171 Lo DLLDBMARIUP ERMS goo eno os oisi 053 6845 545 172 BCM APPLICATION 176 HOW THE SUZUKI BCM APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE TECH 1A 177 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC v BA SBT ere da ole ke bbb dave 178 SETTING UP THE TESTER rr Ras 178 MISSIO kd had 179 eit ods Deu ved vid 180 PERSIE DRE CDI HORN ARR CEA ATR ARERR ZAREOROES 181 3 OPERANNG PRECAUTIONS 183 4 SELEGING THE VEHICLE _ eee ee E PEERS 185 SELECTING THE dee be REE Y deb be 185 THOME 185 han bad sab Sink pul eate a Deoque dle dlc d are buds 185 e neh o db bale darti d did 186 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES 190 SELECTING TEST MODES ER ebd d
35. PRINTING CAPTURED DATA In addition the cartridge has the capability to print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample The VP 411 or compatible printer is required to support this print function See Step 14 of the procedure The operation of SNAPSHOT mode is divided into three phases Set Up Steps 1 4 Data Capture Steps 5 8 and Data Display Steps 9 15 SETUP PHASE To setup Snapshot mode do the following 1 Press Ga to select SNAPSHOT mode from the Select Mode menu 2 The trigger condition and review data options are displayed in a self scrolling SNAPSHOT MODE menu To select a trigger option just press the function key displayed to the left of the desired trigger condition To replay previously captured data press You can choose a specific ABS trouble code for the trigger condition by pressing af When the tester screen displays ENTER DTC XXX use numeric keys to enter the two digit trouble code number that you have selected then press the key The tester will continue to store data until the specified trouble code is detected or until you press the a GU or key If the code you enter does not exist for the vehicle being tested an INVALID DTC message will be displayed and the code will have to be reentered To select a trigger condition press the function key to the left of the desired trigger condition To bypass the Data Capture phase and review previ
36. PUMP MOTOR Allows the user to command the ABS pump motor ON and OFF in order to confirm ABS pump motor operation F2 RELAY TEST Allows you to test the Enable Relay while displaying the ABS relay battery voltage This allows verification of relay operation F3 AUTOBLEED Removes air from the secondary hydraulic circuits by running the ABS motor F4 LAMP TEST Allows manual control of the ABS warning lamp circuit ACTIVE KEYS Stop the automatic scrolling then manually scroll the menu up or down G Select Test Mode or Miscellaneous Test EXIT Return to vehicle selection MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of the DATA LIST mode is to continuously monitor vehicle parameters The tester allows you to display diagnostic parameters for the ABS and Airbag systems The tester displays data parameters in pairs You can use preprogrammed pairs or you can create your own pairs through the process explained on the following pages The tester display tells you which parameters are being monitored The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units This means you don t have to hunt through manuals to determine what is being displayed To access the Data List do the following 1 Press G to select DATA LIST from the Select Mode menu 2 For ABS DBC7 press or from the Select Data List Menu 3 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the Qs key
37. Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu Indicates Cani Purge Val monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F PRG DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM 20 Cani Purge Val monitor value Cani Purg Val Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR CANI PURGE VAL CONTROL MODE ENTER Select the CANI PURGE VAL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen ert m 2 Increase Cani Purge Value while viewing parameters Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 132 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS FOR CANI PURGE VAL CONTROL MODE CONT Decrease Cani Purge Value while viewing parameters Terminate the Purge Value Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu CANI PURG VAL ON OFF TYPE The canister purge valve output control mode allows you to turn the canister purge valve ON open and OFF closed To select the Cani Purg Val On Off in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the CANI PURG VAL Test from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition to the on position 3 Press to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that the means ON and means OFF 5 PRG is displayed at the end of line 2 and the cani purge valve state is displayed at the end of line 4 Press the key to turn the cani p
38. Press to begin the test 3 The tester first automatically controls the engine speed to the current desired idle When the RPM Control Testing Screen is displayed increase the engine RPM by pressing the key or press to decrease the RPM Holding down either key will cause the RPM to change in the appropriate direction If the tester detects any of the following conditions the RPM Control mode will be terminated Vehicle speed detected e Coolant temperature is below 80 C e CTP switch or closed throttle position is OFF 4 While in the RPM CONTROL mode parameters can be displayed as in the DATA LIST mode RPM appears at the end of line two of the display and the currently commanded value of RPM is displayed at the end of line four Data parameters can be scrolled and fixed as in the DATA LIST mode 5 Press 19 9 to return to the initial desired idle control RPM 6 Press 3A to return control of the IAC valve to the ECM and return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 27 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST AY RPM CONTROL FIXED SPARK IAC CAL ENTER CLEAR DTCs amp ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs PENDING DTCs CLEARED BEFORE THIS TEST YES NO IS PERFORMED SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS START ENGINE THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates RPM CONTROL mode IAC FLOW DUTY XXX RP E
39. SH410 SFI ECM DENSO 27 For MT vehicle PCM DENSO 27 For AT vehicle SR series SFI ECM HITACHI 12 MITSUBISHI 28 For Chinese Market F10A engine MRD410 SFI ECM DENSO 27 For MT vehicle RD410 PCM DENSO 27 For AT vehicle RB series SFI ECM DENSO 21 For vehicle with EGR 22 For vehicle without EGR RG413 SFI ECM DENSO 23 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear 42 Vehicle without HO2S 2 rear RH413 416 SFI ECM DENSO 34 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear 47 Vehicle without HO2S 2 rear MRF series SFI ECM DENSO 27 For MT vehicle RF series PCM DENSO 27 For AT vehicle MG413W SFI ECM DENSO 27 SJ413W SJ413 SFI ECM DENSO 33 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 86 1 Suzuki ECM Application Description ECM OBD 1 Application MODEL ENGINE ECU ECU MFT REMARKS CONT TYPE NO 53413 SFI ECM DENSO 17 32 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear 4 SN413V See NOTE GA413 SFI ECM DENSO 19 35 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear MT308 ST308 SFI ECM MITSUBISHI 28 NOTE The ECUs of the following models are applicable to vehicles on and after the following VIN Nos ECU MODEL FOR EUROPEAN FOR OTHER NO MARKETS MARKETS 5 SY413 JSAEGC11S00109522 JSAEGA11S00108641 10 SV620 JSAETD11V00150001 TD11V 200001 11 SE416 JSAETA02C01200001 TD01V 200001 JSAETA02V01200001 JSAETD01V01200001 13 SY413 JSAEGA11S00140001 GA11S 140001 JSAEGC11S00140001 GC11S 140
40. for creating your own data pairs G3 Print data list 1f equipped with serial printer Return to Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 59 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F5 READINESS TESTS Once the tester has established communications with the vehicle it checks the status of the ECM Readiness Tests If the tester determines that the ECM has not completed all of the Readiness Tests it will display a warning message You can then select the Readiness Tests menu item from the SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS menu to examine the status of these tests Not All Vehicle System Readiness Tests Have Been Completed Press a to select READINESS from the SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS menu This mode allows you to monitor the state of various on board tests which are performed by the vehicle s ECM READINESS TEST Misfire SUPPORT Fuel Sys SUPPORT Compre SUPPORT Catalyst INCOMPL Htd Cata INCOMPL Evap Sys INCOMPL 2nd Air INCOMPL A C Sys INCOMPL O2 Sens INCOMPL O2S Heat INCOMPL EGR Sys INCOMPL The first three items on the display indicate the vehicle s monitoring capability for continuously monitored systems Misfire Monitoring Fuel System Monitoring Comprehensive Component Monitoring These are indicated as either being SUPPORTED or NOT SUPPORTED N A depending on the vehicle s ECM The other 8 display items indicate the
41. for creating your own pairs Mark the bottom display parameter as fixed or cancel the top display parameters as fixed for creating your own pairs Toggle between English and Metric units MPH vs km h Output DATA LIST parameters to a printer EXIT Return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 257 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application MODE F1 PRINT DATA PRINT DATA SQ SERIES AIRBAG ONLY When the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed in the tester or if you are using a tester Series A or MTS 3100 tester the Print Data mode allows you to print the VIN engine type and Data List to a serial printer or terminal This is the data list sent by the ECM or PCM to the tester The data list parameters can be printed without printing the VIN or engine type by pressing the key in the Data List or Snapshot Replay mode To Print Data do the following N A Press GP to select the Print Data mode from the Select Mode menu The VIN entry screen is the first screen displayed in this mode Only the last 6 digits of the VIN are entered on this screen This information is then printed out as part of the header information that accompanies each data list print out The VIN is entered via the numeric portion of the key pad and the key is pressed to move to the next section of the print function The next screen requires
42. it ON again Diagnostic Trouble Code display screens may vary from vehicle to vehicle When F2 DTC s is selected from the SELECT MODE menu some vehicles will display a TROUBLE INFO menu while other vehicles will automatically display DTC information The operating procedures for vehicles with the TROUBLE INFO menu are different from the operating procedures for vehicles without the TROUBLE INFO menu TROUBLE INFO TROUBLE INFO Y F0 DTC F3 CLEAR INFO F1 PENDING DTC F2 FREEZE DATA Vehicles without a Trouble Info Menu To select the DTC s mode do the following 1 Press a to select the DTC s mode from the Select Mode menu If no DTC s are present the tester will display a message to that effect 2 If DTC s are present the tester will automatically display each DTC for three seconds Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 110 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S NO DTC S VALID DATA DTC S PRESENT IRCUIT DTC P0130 H 02 SENSOR i MALFUNCTION H CODE 13 OXYGEN SENSOR EXIT OR CIRCUIT FAIL CURRENT CODE 13 OXYGEN SENSOR gt j OR CIRCUIT FAIL HISTORY y EACH CODE DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS OR UNTIL IS PRESSED CLEAR CODES PHASE EXECUTE CLEAR DTC S YES NO CLEAR CODES
43. operation by communicating with the ECM or PCM via the serial data link connector DLC present in the vehicle The tester consists of a microcomputer which communicates with the ECM or PCM and controls its operation a keypad to receive directions from you and a display to provide the data you need to diagnose vehicle electronic problems The tester communicates with the ECM or PCM by applying an electrical signal to a serial data link connector Enable pin then reads the ECM or PCM data signal from the serial data link connector pins and translates it into an intelligible data display The Suzuki ECM Application is the software program which performs all of the functions described in this operator s manual Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 88 2 GETTING STARTED SETTING UP THE TESTER The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter or adapter cable for the vehicle being tested must be connected to the tester DLC Cable in order to connect the tester to the vehicle The following Vehicle Adapter Chart identifies which adapters and cables are required to connect each type of tester to the various Suzuki vehicles All adapters cables and any other hardware required to connect the tester to the vehicle are listed in the chart The Figure Number in the chart refers to the adapter and cable illustrations on the pages following the charts SYSTEM TESTER ADAPTER DESCRIPTION FIGURE Engine System MTS 3100 GM
44. the VIN screen is immediately displayed with the previously selected VIN Pressing the key twice from this screen will cause another data stream to be buffered for printing as soon as the current data stream 1s output from the tester Pressing the key at any point will cause the select mode menu to be displayed If the 2489 key is pressed before printing is completed only the data that has already been sent to the RS232C Cartridge will be printed SOME DATA WILL BE LOST PRINT DATA ENTER LAST 6 VIN PRESS ENTER TO RS232C NOT DIGITS 000000 PRINT DATA CONNECTED THEN PRESS ENTER PRINT DATA VIN SET UP RS232C RS232C INTERFACE ENTRY SCREEN CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE NOT CONNECTED WAITING TO 99 COMPLETE PRINT DATA PRINT DATA PRINT PRINT IN PROGRESS INITIALIZATION SCREEN Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 21 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application 1996 SUZUKI VEHICLE SZ416 VIN 012345 TECH 1 DATA LIST NO DESCRIPTION VALUE 1 COOLANT TEMP 82 C 108 F 2 INTAKE AIR TEMP 21 70 3 DESIRED IDLE 875 RPM 4 CTP SWITCH ON 5 IAC FLOW DUTY 52 FIGURE 5 2 Print Sample ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Move to the next section of the Print Data function VIN entry keys Terminate the Print Data mode and return to the Select Mode menu MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient prob
45. 0 MPH PHASE GEAR POSITION See Steps 4 7 P NIR w FLASHING W WAITING FOR TRIGGER USE CE AND CO To SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P NIR FLASHING T TRIGGER T HAS OCCURRED TECH 1 MEMORY FULL OR 1139 DATA VEHICLE SPEED DISPLAY OMPA PHASE CEARR POSION 0 TRIGGER POSITION See Steps 8 12 P N R 0 AFTER TRIGGER OCCURRED Use and to view different Data Parameters 1ST SCREENS SA MOPE and SAMPLE TIME Use to display LIST SCREENS an trouble codes for See Steps 9 amp 10 the current sample For ECU No 2 ABS made by Sumitomo Denko F1 NOT AVAIL is displayed FIGURE 5 7 Snapshot Mode Flowchart BEFORE TRIGGER OCCURRED Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 209 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application MODE F4 MISCELLANEOUS TESTS SUBMODE F0 HYDRAULIC CONTROL WARNING 4 securely raised and the engine must be off or there will be unintended To perform the Hydraulic Control test both vehicle drive wheels must be vehicle movement that could result in injury The HYDRAULIC CONTROL mode allows you to manually perform the APPLY and RELEASE ABS functions for brake system diagnosis for the following ECU NO MANUFACTURER 15 Sumitomo Denko 21 Sumitomo Denko 27 Nisshinbo To operate Hydraulic Control do the following 1 Before performing this test check the following item
46. 12 14 Pin P N 02001381 Figure 2 1 with 12 Pin Connector Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin P N 02001381 Figure 2 2 Tech 1 None Figure 2 3 Page 89 Suzuki Aftermarket Application 2 Getting Started ECM OBD 1 Application MASTERTECH v Application Cartridge DLC Cable G 12 14 Pin DLC FIGURE 2 1 MTS 3100 Cable Configuration Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 90 2 Getting Started ECM OBD I Application TECH 1A Application Cartridge GM 12 14 Pin Adapter FIGURE 2 2 Tech 1A Cable Configuration Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 91 2 Getting Started ECM OBD 1 Application TECH 1 DLC Cable Application Cartridge FIGURE 2 3 Tech 1 Cable Configuration Before operating the Suzuki ECM Application with a Vetronix tester the following steps must be performed 1 Insert the Application Cartridge that contains the Suzuki ECM Application into the cartridge slot at the back of the MTS 3100 or the bottom slot of the TECH 1 TECH 1A Verify that no other application cartridge is installed in the top slot of the TECH 1 TECH 1A 2 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 3 Connect the DLC Cable to the tester and tighten the screws 4 Refer to Setting Up The Tester on page 89 for the necessary hardware configuration 5 Locate the vehicle s serial Data Link Connector DLC It is usually under the dash on the driver s side Refer to the vehicle service manual if you are in doubt
47. 134 PONO duck graiia ade aback Suen ge ie ed dide 135 AU CORBIS LOR asks bte on pic 2 ERIS AGE ARR d RE d p 136 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC iv ECU NO SPAR OMB TIS cal aden Gee 137 ECU No 40 AU Output Tess 66046266 auod 485448244 PORE EOS OR RHEE 138 Eo ethan eve aaa 138 BLEU MO 052 0h ess 544 SOR FS PIPERS RS OS Le PL Eee 139 4 asiccsdboikas drd acid ded dcces di 141 Ko RD ns sede d dud Adios e good eO LR dot ap d dieto M end 142 amp DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 204464464004 40 4 147 CATEGORY DESCRIPTIONS iuis 44654 4640 44 00004 DIG RGR RA ERE EA 147 DESCRIPTOR FORMAT RAE URN 148 GENERAL PARAMETERS i bi tepis pi i t b S ir xps 151 ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS 152 SPARK CONTROL PARAMETERS gi cicieciviek ee tikus Gp RE C RN RR RN Ra 152 FUEL DELIVERY PARAMETERS ri triate 153 EMISSIONS AND DRIVEABILITY PARAMETERS 159 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS eeeeee ehh hh 162 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 2 45 464456 RERO GR HERE ORE pee ks 164 A IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM 167 BLANK SCREEN onek d kki DE MERERI RE RARE EK Gc 167 DISPLAYSOGOLIDENBSS iicet wer Tq FO Homes wo dep oce del 168
48. 1s to identify short duration intermittent problems For this reason the data 1s taken at a high rate of speed approximately every 1 20th of a second NOTE EH Automatic trigger is not available on ABS DBCT7 systems 10 ANY CODE a9 Any trouble code detected will cause the trigger 11 SINGLE CODE af You can select a specific trouble code that must be detected before the trigger will be set Step 3 in the procedure tells you how to enter the code NOTE J Single Code Trigger is not available on ABS DBC7 systems Once the trigger occurs the tester will retain data according to which trigger point you have selected VIEWING CAPTURED DATA You have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data by selecting REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT menu All data captured during SNAPSHOT will be retained in the tester until it is overwritten by anew SNAPSHOT or if the tester is unplugged from the DLC for at least 24 hours If no data has been captured or if data stored in the tester memory is not data from the vehicle currently being tested 1 it s from a previously tested vehicle the tester will display the following message for 4 seconds or until the or 19 key is pressed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 267 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application CAPTURED DATA CAPTURED DATA NOT FROM SELECTED SELECTED VEHICLE SYSTEM
49. 4 of the tester screen 3 Press Gp to return to the Select Test menu ACTIVE KEYS Turn the selected Lamp ON Turn the selected Lamp OFF EXIT Return to the Select Test menu SELECTTEST Ay F2 RELAY TEST F3 AUTO BLEED F4 LAMP TEST LAMP TEST ON y OFF ABS WARN LAMP OFF FIGURE 5 15 Lamp Test ABS DBC7 MODE F5 MOTOR REHOME DELCO ABS VI This feature allows you to command the ABS motors to drive the pistons to the home position at the top of each bore To run Motor Rehome do the following 1 Press G to select Motor Rehome from the Select Mode menu The tester will not perform a motor rehome if the vehicle is moving if certain codes are set or if the brakes are applied 2 The tester informs you that the motors are being rehomed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 296 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application 3 MOTOR REHOME COMPLETE is displayed when the motors are rehomed then the tester returns to the Select Mode menu NOTE ABS DBC7 systems will automatically reset when exiting each output control test ACTIVE KEYS Select Motor Rehome from the Select Mode menu EXIT Return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 297 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 MOTOR REH
50. Application Page 245 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE TESTER WHILE THE IGNITION KEY IS ON Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the ECU or tester you should not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED You should not remove or install master or auxiliary cartridges while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running If you wish to change or add a cartridge do the following 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Disconnect the Data Link Connector DLC from the vehicle 3 Install the cartridge in the appropriate cartridge slot 4 Reconnect the DLC 5 Turn the ignition ON If the Tester does not appear to be functioning properly do the following to reset the tester 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Disconnect the DLC from the vehicle 3 Remove all cartridges from the tester 4 Connect the DLC to the vehicle Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 246 3 Operating Precautions ABS Airbag Application 5 When MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING is displayed disconnect the DLC from the vehicle 6 Install the cartridge in the appropriate cartridge slot 7 Reconnect the DLC to the vehicle 8 Turn the ignition ON REMOVING OR CHANGING MASTER CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA SNAPSHOT data that has been captured by a master cartridge can be printed on
51. Connect the 12 pin adapter to the vehicle s DLC 6 Turn the ignition switch on Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 92 2 Getting Started ECM OBD 1 Application NOTE For vehicles equipped with an Immobilizer control system power is J supplied to the tester when the ignition switch is ON 7 Verify that the tester displays the software title screen SUZUKI MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE VX X lt ENTER gt 8 Press Gas to display the APPLICATIONS menu APPLICATIONS Y F0 ECM F1 BCM F2 ABS AIRBAG Press the key to the left of ECM to select the Suzuki ECM Application from the APPLICATIONS menu If more than three applications are available use or to scroll the display If the tester display informs you that the companion application is missing contact your tester distributor 9 Verify that the tester displays the screen below and then press GNU SUZUKI ECM X X ENTER If the display is incorrect refer to Appendix A 10 After the application is selected the Language Selection menu is displayed Press the function key to the left of the language you wish to select After the language is selected proceed to Chapter 4 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 93 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED You should not remove or install master or auxiliary cartridges while power is applied If you wish to change or add a cartridge disc
52. F2 TROUBLE CODES F5 ECU ID Not available for all ECUs Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 14 4 Selecting The Model Year Communications Mode amp Test Mode ECM OBD II Application SELECT TRANSMISSION TYPE For 1999 SQ models a Transmission type selection menu appears SELECT TRANS TYPE F0 MT F1 4AT Press the function key corresponding to the transmission type being tested SELECT MODE MENU FOR SQ SERIES SY418 AND JA627 Once the transmission type has been selected the SELECT MODE menu appears MISCELLANEOUS TESTS The F4 MISC TEST menu item is used to select a submenu of tests Pressing displays the miscellaneous tests available for the selected vehicle To return to the Select Mode menu just press 2419 A list of the miscellaneous tests available is included in Chapter 7 How to use the test modes is also explained in Chapter 7 ACTIVE KEYS Select a menu option amp Answer questions on the tester display Return to the previous menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 15 5 OPERATING THE TEST MODES IN SUZUKI MODE The following section contains a brief description of test modes available in the SUZUKI ECM OBD II application Note that the test modes are different for F0 CARB MODE and F1 SUZUKI MODE Also note that descriptions of test modes for the SQ series SY418 and JA627 are provided in Chapter 7 F1 SUZUKI MODE Mode F0 Data List
53. INPROGRESS 60 SEC PLEASE WAIT SOLENOIDS COOLING 180 SEC OPEN LEFT REAR BLEEDER SCREW ENTER ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 60 SEC 4 CLOSE LEFT REAR BLEEDER SCREW OPEN RIGHT FRONT 7 BLEEDER SCREW ENTER ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 60 SEC i CLOSE RIGHT FRNT BLEEDER SCREW OPEN LEFT FRONT 7 BLEEDER SCREW ENTER ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 60 SEC 4 CLOSE LEFT FRONT BLEEDER SCREW OPEN LEFT REAR 17 BLEEDER SCREW ENTER ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 20 SEC CLOSE LEFT REAR BLEEDER SCREW OPEN RIGHT FRONT BLEEDER SCREW ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 20 SEC l CLOSE RIGHT FRONT BLEEDER SCREW OPEN LEFT FRONT BLEEDER SCREW ENTER ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 20 SEC 4 CLOSE LEFT FRONT BLEEDER SCREW PROCEDURE J COMPLETE RELEASE PRESSURE FROM BLEED EQUIPMENT AND DISCONNECT EXIT Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 295 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application F4 LAMP TEST The Lamp test allows you to manually control lamps for diagnostic purposes The tester displays the list of Lamps for the vehicle you are testing To run the Lamp Test do the following 1 Press GJ to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G9 to select the LAMP Test Use the and keys to turn the Lamp ON and OFF The commanded state of the lamp is displayed in the right comer on line
54. MODE ECU ID ECU ID mode is NOT available for all vehicles The ECU ID mode allows you to view the ECU identification number as well as the Software Version number Select the ECU ID mode from the Select Mode menu by pressing SELECT MODE Ay SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F3 SNAPSHOT F1 PRINT DATA F4 MISC TESTS F2 DTC S F5 ECU ID The tester will display the following screen ECU NO XXXXX XXXX SOFTWARE VERSION XXX To return to the Select Mode menu press 2419 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 72 8 FINISHING UP After using the SUZUKI Application Cartridge a few simple steps will insure that you get the most life out of your diagnostic tool First remove power to the tester by disconnecting the serial data link cable from the serial data link connector You may want to inspect the cable and connector for any damage or corrosion Next unplug the cartridge and store it and the cable in the travelling case If the tester should become dirty you may wipe it off with a clean cloth and mild detergent or hand soap Avoid using harsh solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents Benzene Trichloroethylene etc Although the tester is water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester prior to storage Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 73 9 IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM Although the tester was designed to give you years of trouble free service occasional p
55. MODE v F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE F3 SNAPSHOT REPLAY PREVIOUSLY CAPTURED DATA SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F DATA CAPTURE PHASE COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F W YES More Data Parameters 5 The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter as well as all trouble codes are saved for each sample The data display will indicate the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the key can always be used to force a trigger 6 Once the trigger occurs the tester will continue to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a flashing T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically and the tester goes to the Data Display phase COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F W 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F Waiting for Trigger Trigger Occurs Data Display Phase 7 Pressing 341 will terminate the Data Capture phase If the trigger has already occurred the Snapshot mode will move to the Data Display Phase
56. Motors F2 HYDRAULIC CONTROL Allows testing of the ABS brake hydraulic channels by automatically sequencing through RELEASE HOLD and APPLY functions on the channel you select F4 MOTOR TEST Once the motor pack has been separated from the ABS hydraulic modulator the Motor test guides you through an automated ABS Motor Pack test F5 GEAR TENSION RELIEF Allows you to relieve tension from the motor gears in order to allow the motor pack to be separated from the modulator assembly F6 RELAY TEST Allows you to test the Enable Relay while displaying the ABS relay battery voltage This allows verification of relay operation F7 VOLTAGE LOAD TEST Allows you to check the battery for adequate capacity for ABS operation Appropriate messages are displayed that indicate any required area of service F8 LAMP TEST Allows manual control of ABS amber warning lamp circuit red brake telltale circuit and light blue ABS active lamp if equipped F9 SYSTEM ID The System ID function displays data about the vehicle s ABS Controller Idle Up Circuit Test 4WD 3WSS Type Only F3 IDLE UP TEST Allows you to perform the Manual Control test on the Idle Up Circuit while displaying the circuit s feedback Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 254 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application DBC7 Miscellaneous Test Descriptions F0 SOLENOID TEST Allows manual control of the hydraulic circuit valves for each channel F1
57. OFF For vehicles with ECU Numbers 7 10 11 13 14 and 20 as described in the Suzuki ECM Application Coverage on page 85 ON is displayed when the EGR valve is not fully closed when EGR gas flows into the intake manifold and OFF is displayed when the EGR valve is fully closed when EGR gas does not flow into the intake manifold The EGR gas flow is regulated according to driving conditions by the stepper motor which is operated by signals from the ECM For all other vehicles ON is indicated when the EGR SV valve turns on when EGR gas flows into the intake manifold and OFF is displayed when the EGR SV valve turns off when EGR gas does not flow into the intake manifold The EGR gas flow is regulated according to driving conditions by the EGR modulator and the solenoid vacuum valve which switches the vacuum passage to the diaphragm of the EGR valve EGR TEMPERATURE DEGREES C DEGREES F EGR Temperature is an internal ECM or PCM parameter The EGR temperature sensor is installed on the EGR valve When the EGR valve opens and EGR gas flows the temperature parameter should rise If the temperature does not rise the EGR system is faulty Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 159 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application EVAP CANIST STATES EVAP Canist displays the state of the evaporative purge canister valve EVAP PURGE DUTY The EVAP Purge Duty is used to control the EVAP solenoid purge val
58. OFF and the key to turn the relay back ON If the relay is commanded OFF the battery voltage should drop to below 5 0V within 2 seconds If it fails to do this the tester will inform you that the relay contacts appear to be closed Consult the service manual to make the necessary repairs 7 Press the 24 key to return to the Select Test menu ACTIVE KEYS Select Relay test Turns relay ON Turns relay OFF Return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 286 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT TEST F5 GEAR TEN REL F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD TEST OF ABS ENABLE RELAY 4 Seconds or keypress ABS RELAY TEST y OFF RELAY CMD ON EBCM BATT 12 9V ABS RELAY TEST A ON V OFF RELAY CMD OFF EBCM BATT 0 9V If voltage fails to drop when relay is commanded OFF RELAY CONTACTS APPEAR TO BE CLOSED REPAIR AS NECESSARY SUBMODE F7 VOLTAGE LOAD TEST In the Voltage Load test you can energize many of the ABS components to create a significant current draw Ignition voltage and ABS battery voltage are then monitored If one or both voltages drop significantly appropriate messages are displayed to direct you to the required area or service To run the Voltage Load Test do the following 1 Press GJ to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See Important on page 253 2 For AWD 3WSS press to
59. Page 160 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application IAC ISC DUTY UNITS BYPASS AIR TYPE The IAC Valve uses a duty solenoid valve It controls the engine idle speed by varying the valve open time within a certain set cycle and thus controls the amount of bypass air Idle Air Control Duty is obtained by using T on T x 100 96 THROTTLE POSITION TYPE For ISC systems engine idle speed is controlled by the ISC motor which is attached to the throttle body The ISC motor moves the throttle valve by the ECM based on engine speed and throttle opening signals The ISC DUTY parameter indicates the opening of the throttle valve in terms of percentage to the opening controllable by the ISC motor Idle Speed Control Duty is obtained by using ISC DUTY TAS 10 x 100 96 TAS Throttle Angle for ISC TAMAX Controllable opening 10 Offset IAC MOTOR POSITION STEP This parameter represents the position of the IAC valve driven by the stepping motor 0 step means that the IAC valve is closed When the step value is large it means that the IAC valve opening is large POWER STEERING PRESSURE PSP SWITCH ON OFF The Power Steering Pressure Switch parameter displays ON when the steering wheel is cranked all the way to the right or left SOLENOID VACUUM PS SV VALVE ON OFF The PSP ON signal 1s fed to the ECM or PCM which actuates the IAC Valve and PS SV for compensating idle speed This cont
60. RYEN GAS EN S ENEN 72 8 FINISHING UP ooo ccc cece e err 73 9 IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM n BLANK SCREEN dub o Ru do Ado POR dae QE 74 SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Hee ES OC 75 MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING 75 KEYBOARD DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE 76 DATA NOT BEING RECEIVED NERA 76 PARAMETERS FLASH ON OFF 1 oc 77 TESTER IS NOT ABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE VEHICLE 77 TESTER STOPS COMMUNICATING WITH THE VEHICLE 78 PARAMETER UPDATE RATE IS SLOW _ ck ees 78 NOT ALL PARAMETERS ARE DISPLAYED 79 UNDERSTANDING SUZUKI ECMS see ECM OBD I APPLICATION 1 SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION DESCRIPTION 84 SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION COVERAGE see 85 Other Than Nori American Markel ouosdcesac aac cnt p E pac ex ao Se go Roe de doa 85 North American Market 1991 1993 icis iss eus tk ant tki eiris 88 HOW THE SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE VETRONIX TESTER 88 X GETTING STARTED daeeshedcRdUS aed QR Reda icd 89 SETTING UP THE TESTER csacccnscswstasbessgbicecbasensdsevesieed 89 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC iii 3 OPERATING PRECAULHONS upeepedadakx erkide bd ded 94 REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIE
61. SELECT MODE MENU Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 101 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS Select Test Mode amp Stop automatic menu scrolling then used to manually control the menu display Return to Vehicle Select step or return to Select Mode menu from Miscellaneous Tests menu MAIN TEST MODES The following tables list the test modes for specific ECUs X support blank no support For applicable model corresponding to ECU Nos see Suzuki ECM Application Coverage on page 85 Suzuki Mode SELECT SUB MENU m gm MODE S S e ar r eo ae N MNN O IMIE FO Data List X x x x X X IX X X X X X F1 Print Data X x X X X IX IX X X X X X F2 Trouble Code X X x X X I X X X X X X X Clear DTC x x X X X X X X X X X F3 Snapshot Any Code X x X X X X X X X X X X x Single Code X x X X X X X X X X X X X Manual Trig X x x X X X X X X X X X x Replay Data X X x X IX IX IX X X X X X X F4 Misc Test RPM Control x x x x X x x x x X X Fixed Spark x x X X X X X X X X x IAC Cal x x xX x EGR x Step EGR x x X Evap Cani Purg Duty X Evap Cani Purg On Off X X Fuel Pump Cont MIL Control
62. SET 1 DRIVE VEHICLE PRIOR TO CYCLES AGO CLEARING DTC s 5 Seconds ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select DTC History from the Select Mode menu Toggle between MPH and km h display 1 anually scroll the display M lly Il the display Stop the display from sequencing EXIT Return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 261 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application MODE F2 DTC S DTC INFO The DTC s or DTC CODES mode displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes which have been set by the vehicle You can also use the DTC mode to clear the codes after the codes have been displayed DTC s or DTC CODES are set when an abnormal condition is detected They are a key to diagnosing many of the problems which can occur in the vehicle Therefore you should look to see if any trouble codes are set at the beginning of every diagnostic session To access DTC Info do the following 1 Verify that the ignition is in the ON position 2 Press to select the DTC s or INFO mode from the Select Mode menu 3 If the ABS or AIRBAG is being tested and the vehicle s ABS or AIRBAG fails to respond to the tester within 6 seconds the tester will display NO COMMUNICATION ECU WITH VEHICLE or CHECK DLC NO DATA RECEIVED NO RESPONSE FROM SIR AIRBAG ABS Under these conditions or if the tester displays WAITING FOR DATA for more than 6 seconds you shou
63. STORAGE BCM CARTIRDGE VX X ENTER ENTER Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes Master Cartridge loose or dirty contacts tester malfunction Recommendations Cycle power to the tester unplug and replug the serial data link connector Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector e Check serial data link cable and connector for wear or corrosion TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA POSSIBLE WRONG ECU SELECTED NO SERIAL DATA FAIL CHECK DATA LINK ECU NO RESPONSE DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT AND RESELECT EXIT EXIT Most Likely Cause e ECU serial data link connector cable problems Stopin ABS control module communication function refer to the note on page 193 Other Possible Causes Serial data link cable loose or bad or connector pins loose or corroded Bad ECU Recommendations Verify a good serial data link cable connection Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 232 A If You re Having a Problem BCM Application Cycle power to the tester Run the tester Self test DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P N R Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes e Serial data link cable connector pins loose or corroded e ECU serial data link connector cable problems Intermittent ECU problem Recommendatio
64. T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically and the tester goes to the Data Display phase 7 Pressing 341 will terminate the Data Capture phase If the trigger has already occurred the Snapshot mode will move to the Data Display Phase ACTIVE KEYS IN SNAPSHOT DATA CAPTURE PHASE amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Manual trigger Display captured data if trigger has already occurred Data Display Phase 8 The Data Display phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data to be displayed by using the keys During the Data Display phase the DTC s present during each sample can be displayed by pressing Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 118 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application More Data Samples before the trigger Data Sample that occured COOLANT AE Ja petore INTAKE AIR TEMP occured 40 104 F 1 More Data Samples DESIRED IDLE M Trigger 40 C 104 F 797 RPM Position INTAKE AIR TEMP IDLE SWITCH Parameters 40 104F 0 ON Data Sample COOLANT TEMP More Data Samples that occured 40 C 104 F just after INTAKE
65. TEST F9 SYSTEM ID DELCO CHASSIS DIVISION ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM VI 4 Seconds or keypress ABS VI 1995 SUZUKI SWIFT VERSION 1 0 4 Seconds or keypress PROM ID 3106 DATE CODE 2626 SEQUENCE 14414 CONFIG ID 4097 4 Seconds or keypress FIGURE 5 12 Examples of System ID Displays ACTIVE KEYS a Select System ID from the Select Test menu Manually scroll the display screen Freeze the display screen Return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 291 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application MODE F4 MISC TESTS DELPHI ABS DBC7 SUBMODE F0 SOLENOID TEST The Solenoid Test allows the user to manually control solenoids for component diagnosis You can control the solenoids ON and OFF by controlling their direction Hold or Release Pressure Hold The pressure hold mode activates the selected wheel circuit inlet valve placing it in the pressure hold position While in the pressure hold position the valve will not allow master cylinder pressure to be delivered to the hydraulic wheel circuit Pressure Release The pressure release mode activates the selected hydraulic wheel circuit valves placing them in the pressure reduce position When in the pressure reduce position the valve will allow wheel caliper pressure to be returned to the master cylinder circuit To run the Solenoid Test
66. a current trouble code is present when Snapshot Trigger Condition is selected the tester displays the following NOTE message CURRENT TROUBLE CODE SET DATA NO LONGER VALID ENTER To clear the trouble code s use Mode F2 TROUBLE CODES to display the current Trouble Codes Repair the cause of the trouble code s then clear the codes using Mode F2 When all current trouble codes have been cleared select F3 SNAPSHOT again to capture or display vehicle data 3 To choose a specific ECU trouble code press Gp in the Snapshot Options menu How to enter the code is explained below NOTE This selection is not available when testing the ABS with ECU No 2 made by Sumitomo Denko When the tester screen displays SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER ECU xx use numeric keys 9 to enter the two digit trouble code number that you have selected then press the key The tester will continue to store data until the specified trouble code is detected or until you press the key If the code you enter does not exist for the ECU being tested an INVALID CODE message will be displayed and the code will have to be reentered Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 204 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application ACTIVE KEYS Select trigger condition Select Replay Data hold Select RS232C Set Up menu Select specific trouble code Enter select
67. bottom slot of tester Other Possible Causes Dirty contacts on the application cartridge connector Two application cartridges installed Recommendations Verify that an application cartridge is installed Clean contacts on application cartridge connector with alcohol Try a different application cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 75 9 If You re Having A Problem II Application KEYBOARD DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE SUZUKI ECM OBD Il X X ENTER Keyboard or display locked up or program sporadically returns to first page Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes Application Cartridge loose or dirty contacts Tester malfunction Recommendations e Cycle power to the tester unplug and replug the serial data link connector Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector e Check serial data link cable and connector for wear or corrosion DATA NOT BEING RECEIVED POSSIBLE WRONG ECM SERIAL DATA FAIL SELECTED NO DATA CHECK DATA LINK CHECK LINK AND AND RESELECT RESELECT EXIT Tester is not receiving data Most Likely Cause e ECM serial data link connector cable problems Other Possible Causes Serial data link cable loose or bad or connector pins loose or corroded Bad ECM Recommendations e Verify a good serial data link cable connection Cycle p
68. conditions are MANUAL TRIGGER Gp While operating the SNAPSHOT mode you can always cause the trigger to occur by pressing the CUAB or XI keys Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 266 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application AUTOMATIC TRIGGER aD The tester examines the ABS data and triggers the SNAPSHOT if an abnormal condition occurs The ABS automatic trigger feature is intended to identify deviations in data or input signals that may not set an ABS trouble code If an automatic trigger condition is encountered it may provide information to support customer complaints of irregular ABS performance or intermittent ABS warning lights The automatic trigger will occur if one of the following conditions exists A sudden change in speed of one wheel Be sure you are driving at a constant speed on a clean dry smooth surface when a trigger occurs Spinning the tires locking the wheels while braking driving through pot holes or performing ABS stops will cause a trigger that is NOT identifying a system problem e Very short loss of brake switch input that may not set a code but will cause a momentary loss of ABS Very short loss of brake switch circuit input that may not set a code but will cause a momentary loss of ABS Ifthe red brake telltale turns on Ifthe battery voltage falls below 11 0 volts or goes above 16 volts Loss of data The intent of the ABS automatic trigger feature
69. displayed data parameters Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Advance to A C COND FAN Control test Switch the A C COND FAN on while viewing parameters Switch the A C COND FAN off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 70 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM II Application F1 Readiness Tests Press to select READINESS TESTS from the MISC TEST menu This mode allows you to monitor the state of various on board tests which are performed by the vehicle s ECM Misfire SUPPORT Fuel Sys SUPPORT Compre SUPPORT Catalyst INCOMPL Evap Sys INCOMPL O2 Sens INCOMPL O2S Heat INCOMPL EGR Sys INCOMPL The first three items on the display indicate the vehicle s monitoring capability for continuously monitored systems Misfire Monitoring Fuel System Monitoring Comprehensive Component Monitoring These are indicated as either being supported or NOT SUPPORTED N A depending on the vehicle s ECM The other 5 display items indicate the status of the tests These tests can be Completed Incomplete or Not Supported Press to advance to the next screen or press to return to the previous screen Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 71 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM II Application
70. do the following 1 Turn ignition to the run position 2 Raise tested wheel s about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 3 Press to select Misc Test from the Select Mode Menu 4 Select to select the Solenoid Test 5 Select from the following Solenoid Test menu LF HOLD FI RF HOLD F3 RA HOLD Rear Axle F4 LF RELEASE F5 RF RELEASE F7 RA RELEASE Rear Axle 6 Have the assistant command the Hold or Release pressure by pressing for ON or for OFF using the tester NOTE The ABS solenoids will automatically be turned OFF if left in the ON EH position for more than 3 seconds 7 While solenoid is commanded in the ON position for either Hold or Release attempt to rotate the wheel being tested it should move even though the assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal The front wheels may de difficult to rotate if the system is working properly 8 Press dup to return to the solenoid test menu Press 4E again to display the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 292 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application NOTE When you exit from the solenoid test the tester will rehome the motors J and display a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed SUBMODE F1 PUMP MOTOR TEST The Pump Motor Test allows the user to command the ABS pump motor ON and OFF in order to confirm ABS pump motor operation To run t
71. faster than 10 MPH However if a current code is set a drive cycle occurs counter increment for that code even if 10 MPH is not reached prior to turning off the ignition NOTE If no ABS faults have occurred for 100 drive cycles the ABS controller EH will clear itself of all fault information To access DTC History do the following 1 Press a to select DTC History from the Select Mode menu 2 The tester displays two pages of information about the first failure which occurred The first page indicates how many times the failure has occurred over how many drive cycles The second page tells how many drive cycles have occurred since the code was last set The pages automatically sequence at 5 second intervals Press to manually sequence through the pages or to stop the sequencing 3 Step 2 is repeated to display information from the first five failures If fewer failures have occurred only information from failures that have occurred is displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 260 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application 4 After the first five or fewer trouble codes have been viewed the tester displays additional information from the most recent failure Five pages are needed to display all of the information about the last failure as shown in the flow chart on the following page These pages automatically sequence at 5 second intervals or you can press to manually
72. is captured ACTIVE KEYS Replay previously captured data Select the manual trigger mode Select the automatic trigger mode Select the trigger on any code mode Select the trigger on specified code Select Trigger Point Select specific trouble code ENTER Enter selected trouble code Eo 999998 Terminate the SNAPSHOT mode and return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 269 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT SETUP F4 MISC TESTS PHASE REPLAY PREVIOUSLY CAPTURED DATA SELECT TRIGGER POINT FRONT WHL SPEEDS SNAPSHOT OPTIONS TRIGGER POINT AT 55 MPH 56 MPH F0 REPLAY DATA F0 BEGINNING REAR WHL SPEEDS F1 MANUAL TRIG F1 CENTER 55MPH 56 0 F2 AUTO TRIG F2 END OF DATA F3 ANY CODE F4 SINGLE CODE F9 TRIG POINT ENTER DTC XXX Code then ENTER DATA FRONT WHL SPEEDS CAPTURE REAR WHL SPEEDS PHASE 55MPH 56 W More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 5 Snapshot Setup Phase DATA CAPTURE PHASE 5 Once the trigger condition is specified the tester begins storing data parameters and trouble codes while displaying the Data List parameters Trouble codes for some systems are also stored and can be displayed in the Data Display phase 6 The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of e
73. key to be pressed to start printing the data This screen allows the cable to be connected between the tester and the receiving device When the Gas key is pressed WAITING TO PRINT DATA is displayed until printing begins If this screen is displayed for more than a few seconds something is wrong with the set up procedure Check that all connections are secure and that the printer is turned on and in the proper receive mode A 5 As printing begins the tester displays the COMPLETE of the print procedure After the printing is 100 complete the VIN screen is immediately displayed with the previously selected VIN number Pressing the key twice from this screen will cause another data stream to be buffered for printing as soon as the current data stream 1s output from the tester 6 Pressing the key at any point will cause the select mode menu to be displayed If the key is pressed before printing is completed only the data that has already been sent to the RS232C Cartridge will be printed SOME DATA WILL BE LOST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 197 a Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application PRINT DATA ENTER LAST 6 VIN PRESS ENTER TO RS232C NOT DIGITS 000000 PRINT DATA CONNECTED THEN PRESS ENTER PRINT DATA VIN SET UP RS232 RS232 INTERFACE ENTRY SCREEN CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE NOT CONNECTED WAITING TO 99 COMPLETE PRINT DATA PRINT DATA PRINT PRINT INPROGRESS INITIALIZATION SCRE
74. operating temperature Press isa to begin the test and then check that the ignition timing is within the specification by using a timing light Refer to the Service Manual for the specifications of initial ignition timings AR Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the keys If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed Press to terminate the Fixed Spark mode and return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F Indicates Fixed Spark mode INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104F FXS More Data Pairs Fixed Spark Mode Screen Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 126 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS FOR FIXED SPARK MODE amp Scroll through displayed parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Advance to FIXED SPARK mode provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Return to Miscellaneous Test menu IAC CAL The purpose of the IAC CAL mode is to set the duty of the IAC valve to a certain value at idle speed This is done by adjusting the Idle adjustment screw in the throttle body The IAC CAL mode allows monito
75. or circuit failure 35 ENGINE SPEED No engine speed signal inputted while engine running INPUT CKT MALF 36 ATF TEMP SEN CKT Voltage at sensor terminal of TCM is high MALF HIGH VOLT 36 VSS TRANS amp Vehicle Speed Sensor Transmission amp Meter Signal not METER NO SIGNAL received by the TCM Vehicle Speed Sensor Transmission amp Meter circuit failure 37 INPUT REVOLUTION Input Revolution Sensor signal not received by the TCM SENSOR FAIL Input Revolution Sensor circuit failure 38 ATF TEMP SEN CKT Voltage at sensor terminal of TCM is low MALF LOW VOLT 41 PRESS CONT SOL Pressure Control Solenoid open OPEN 42 PRESS CONT SOL Pressure Control Solenoid short SHORT 51 COOLANT TEMP Coolant Temperature Signal is held low too long SIGNAL FAIL Coolant Temperature Signal system or circuit problem 52 MEMORY CHECK Power supply relay voltage monitor in the TCM fails to comply SUM ERROR with the command from the CPU Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 215 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application ABS TROUBLE CODES ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE C1013 ABS CONT MODULE ABS control module of wrong specification installed WRONG ASSEMBLY 15 or C1015 G SENSOR FAIL A failure condition is detected in the G sensor or its circuit 4WD ONLY 16 STOP LAMP SWITCH Stop lamp switch open OPEN
76. required to connect a Tech 1A tester is described in Chapter 2 of the application manuals that follow On some vehicles power to the cigarette lighter is controlled by the ignition switch When testing these vehicles with a TECH 1 or TECH 14A it is best to connect the tester directly to the battery with the optional Battery Adapter Cable P N 02001636 which is available from your TECH 1A distributor Using This Cartridge With The MTS 3100 Tester In addition to the TECH 1 TECH 1A this cartridge can also be used with the MTS 3100 tester The operation of the cartridge and the vehicle identification screens test menus and data screens are as described in this manual The cartridge can be used with the MTS 3100 tester in conjunction with a program card which allows viewing of data list screens in full screen Enhanced Mode displays Refer to the Enhanced Mode operating instructions in the Multi Function Tester Program Card Operator s Manual for further details and examples of Enhanced Mode displays How to connect the MTS 3100 tester to a Suzuki vehicle is described in Chapter 2 of the application manuals that follow Introduction The Suzuki application cartridge is compatible with the TECH 1 TECH 1A and MTS 3100 testers Applications described in this Operator s Manual include Engine Control Module ECM OBD II Engine Control Module ECM OBD I Body Control Module BCM Anti Lock Brake Airbag ABS AIRBAG When diagnosing a s
77. select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press to select the Voltage Load Test 4 The tester display will confirm that you are in the ABS Voltage Load test The display will automatically scroll after 4 seconds or after pressing the key 5 Press the key to sequence through the 3 message displays that caution you against abusing or overusing this test 6 When ABS VOLTAGE TEST is displayed on the tester screen start the engine and leave the transmission in park neutral Press the key to continue the test Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 287 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application 7 The tester will ask you to press on the brake pedal firmly Do so and the tester display will inform you of the current ABS ignition voltage and the ABS battery voltage Press the key to start the test If the Voltage Load test has just been performed you may have to wait up to 60 seconds for the components to cool before the test can be run again If you attempt to run the Voltage Load test again too soon the tester displays a warning and a countdown timer showing how long before the test can be run again 8 The test will take 6 to 10 seconds to complete during which time you must keep the brake pedal depressed The tester will inform you that the test is in progress When the tester concludes the test the results of the tests are displayed 9 Press the key to return to the Select Test menu SELEC
78. sequence through them or to freeze the display In the following sample flow char the first failure code 27 demonstrates an intermittent fault that was the first code set but it hasn t occurred for the past 13 drive cycles The second failure of the flow chart demonstrates an intermittent fault that was the second code set but it hasn t occurred in the present drive cycle In the example the last failure is the same as the second failure since only two failures had occurred It is also possible for the last failure to be the same as the first because the first is an intermittent problem and could possibly cause another trouble code to be set after the second failure has been set 5 Press to return to the Select Mode menu SELECT MODE LAST FAILURE F0 DATA LIST DTC 42 WAS SET 1 t F1 DTC HISTORY AT 55 MPH THE S F2 DTC s BRAKE WAS ON 5 Seconds FIRST FAILURE THE BRAKE WARN DTC 27 WAS SET LAMP WAS OPEN 2nd 1 OF LAST 14 AND ABS WAS DRIVE CYCLES ACTIVE 5 Seconds 5 Seconds FIRST FAILURE SOMETIME DURING DTC 27 WAS LAST THIS IGN CYCLE 3rd SET 14 DRIVE THE BRK SW INPUT CYCLES AGO WAS NOT PRESENT 5 Seconds 5 Seconds SECOND FAILURE AND VEHICLE SPD DTC 42 WAS SET WAS lt 25 MPH Ath 5 OF LAST 5 THERE HAVE BEEN DRIVE CYCLES 2 DRIVE CYCLES 5 Seconds 5 Seconds SECOND FAILURE SINCE THIS LAST DTC 42 WAS LAST FAILURE REPAIR 5th
79. status of the tests These tests can be Completed Incomplete or Not Supported Press to advance to the next screen or press to return to the previous screen Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 60 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F6 ON BOARD TESTS PENDING DTCS When you select the F1 Pending DTCs in the ON BOARD TESTS menu the tester reads all pending DTCs which have been saved by the ECM and then displays e two column list of all DTCs How many codes have been reported ON BOARD TESTS F1 Pending DTCs Pending DTCs 4 P0102 P0105 P0103 P0104 ENTER DTC P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input A pending DTC description can be displayed for any Pending DTC by moving the next to the desired DTC and pressing GMa The is moved by pressing the or or Moves the up or down ENTER Display pending DTC description Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 61 7 OPERATING THE TEST MODES FOR THE SQ SERIES SY418 AND JA627 The following section contains a brief description of test modes available in the SUZUKI ECM OBD II application Note that the test modes are different from F0 CARB MODE and F1 SUZUKI MODE Mode F0 Data List Monitor enhancement data parameters for SUZUKI vehicles from the engine computer Mode F1 Print Data Send one data stream of information to a serial printer terminal or smart device Mode F2 Tr
80. that the tester displays the screen below SUZUKI MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE VX X ENTER 8 Press Gs to display the APPLICATIONS menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 181 2 Getting Started BCM Application APPLICATIONS Ay FO ECM F1 BCM F2 ABS AIRBAG Press the key to the left of BCM to select the Suzuki BCM Application from the APPLICATIONS menu If more than three applications are available use or to scroll the display If the tester display informs you that the companion application is missing contact your tester distributor 9 Verify that the tester displays the screen below then press SUZUKI BCM X X ENTER 10 After the application is selected the Language Selection menu is displayed ENGLISH Ay F4 ESPANOL D ImT71 DEUTSCH FRANCAIS Press the function key to the left of the language you wish to select Then proceed to Chapter 4 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 182 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE CAUTION TESTER WHILE THE IGNITION KEY IS ON Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the ECU or tester you should not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running REMOVING OR CHANGING MASTER CAR TRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA SNAPSHOT data that has been captured by a master cartridge can be printed on a tester or compatible printer
81. the key to be pressed to start printing the data This screen allows the cable to be connected between the tester and the receiving device When the Gas key is pressed the WAITING TO PRINT DATA screen is displayed until printing begins If this screen is displayed for more than a few seconds something is wrong with the set up Check that all connections are secure and that any receiving device is turned on and in the proper receive mode As printing begins the tester displays the COMPLETE of the print procedure After the printing is 100 complete the VIN screen is immediately displayed with the previously selected VIN Pressing the key twice from this screen will cause another data stream to be buffered for printing as soon as the current data stream 1s output from the tester Pressing the key at any point will cause the select mode menu to be displayed If the 248 key Is pressed before printing is completed only the data that has already been sent to the RS232C Cartridge will be printed SOME DATA WILL BE LOST PRINT DATA ENTER LAST 6 VIN PRESS ENTER TO RS232C NOT DIGITS 000000 PRINT DATA CONNECTED THEN PRESS ENTER PRINT DATA VIN SET UP RS232C RS232C INTERFACE ENTRY SCREEN CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE NOT CONNECTED as PRINT PRINT IN PROGRESS INITIALIZATION SCREEN ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Move to the next section of the Print Data function
82. the key to return control of the IAC valve to the ECM or PCM and to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu ACTIVE KEYS FRO RPM CONTROL Increase engine speed Decrease engine speed amp Scroll through displayed data parameters qo q Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 125 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS FRO RPM CONTROL CONT ENTER Advance to RPM control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Return to initial desired idle RPM control EXIT Terminate the RPM CONTROL mode and return to the Miscellaneous Test menu FIXED SPARK MODE The purpose of the Fixed Spark mode is to continuously monitor data parameters while commanding ECM or PCM operation in the fixed spark mode The Fixed Spark mode allows you to set the ignition timing The Fixed Spark mode allows monitoring of data parameters in a manner identical to that of the Data List mode Fixed spark operation is indicated by the letters FXS in the lower right corner of the display as shown on the following page To select Fixed Spark Miscellaneous Test do the following Select FIXED SPARK mode from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu N Block the wheels set the parking brake put the transmission in Park or Neutral and then start the engine Warm the engine to
83. the injectors that feed cylinder banks 1 and 2 respectively Values less than 0 indicate a reduction in fuel injection duration to correct for an overall rich condition Values greater than 0 indicate an increase in fuel injection duration to correct for an overall lean condition TURBO PRESSURE UNITS HPa Turbo pressure value indicates air pressure compressed by the turbo charger Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 158 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application EMISSIONS AND DRIVEABILITY PARAMETERS CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID CANISTER PURGE DUTY The Canister Purge Solenoid parameter displays the degree to which the purge valve is either open or closed 0 means that the purge valve is completely closed while 100 is fully open valve CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION ON OFF The Closed Throttle Position parameter indicates whether the throttle position is in the idle state or not ON means that the throttle position is within the range for the idle state and OFF indicates that the throttle position is not within the idle state range CTP SWITCH ON OFF The CTP Switch parameter will read ON when the throttle valve is fully closed or OFF when the throttle is not fully closed DESIRED IDLE SPEED RPM The Desired Idle Speed is an ECM or PCM internal parameter which indicates the ECM or PCM requested idle If the engine is not running this number is not valid EGR EGR VALVE ON
84. the tester displays one of the following messages TEST ENDED OR TEST INTERRUPTED 6 After the TEST ENDED or TEST INTERRUPTED message is displayed the tester returns to the Output Tests menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 137 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ECU NO 40 ALL OUTPUT TESTS To select ECU No 40 All Output Tests in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the test you want from the Output Control menu The tester displays TEST OF XXXX 2 Set the parking brake and securely block the wheels of the vehicle XXXX indicates the selected test XXXX indicates the selected test 3 Press MU to begin the test The tester displays 4 Press The tester displays a data list as well as information about the test status on the right side of the screen XXX indicates the selected test ON or OFF is displayed ENGINE SPEED 1833 RPM XXX START OF INJECT 9 3deg ON 5 Press or to toggle the ECU function ON or OFF The tester displays XXXX indicates the selected test TEST ENDED XXXX ON or OFF is displayed 6 Press to return to Step 4 7 After the test runs for 30 seconds the tester returns to the Output Tests menu READINESS TEST The Readiness Test mode allows you to monitor the state of various on board tests which are performed by the vehicle s ECM
85. the tester s Snapshot memory until the memory is full This allows data to be saved both before and after the trigger A TRIGGER POINT which sampled data is saved can be selected To change the trigger point select F4 TRIGGER POINT from the SNAPSHOT MENU Pressing F0 Beginning will save only the data after the trigger F1 Center will save an equal amount of data before and after the trigger and F2 End will save only data before the trigger If no Trigger Point has been selected since the Tester was turned on the default is Center SELECT TRIGGER Y F0 Beginning F1 Center F2 End Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 53 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode Data Capture The Snapshot data capture process is started by selecting one of the Trigger modes Once it is started the tester will display diagnostic data parameters plus a status message a flashing W in the lower right of the screen indicating that the tester is Waiting for the trigger NOTE While waiting for the selected trigger the EMEB GOD or key can always be used to force a manual trigger Engine Speed 1052 RPM Ign Timing 18 5 When the trigger condition occurs the status message will change to a T NOTE Note Pressing 2248 after a trigger has occurred will end the data capture phase When the memory in the tester is full the status message will change to 0 representing the Snapshot data sample 0
86. the trigger 11 The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer To print the data press The tester keyboard will be disabled while data is being sent to the printer SNAPSHOT data can also be printed in a tabular format using the Screen Print feature if the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed or if you are using a TECH 1 Series A tester Screen Print is enabled by pressing until an RS232 SET UP menu is displayed Press aij to enable the Screen Print function Refer to the RS232C I F or TECH 1 Series A Operator s Manual for more detail 12 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press 18 to return to the Snapshot Options menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press again to return to the select mode menu ACTIVE KEYS IN SNAPSHOT DATA DISPLAY PHASE amp QI9 Scroll through displayed data parameters amp Scroll through selected samples G9 lt GD Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively 2 Display DTC s for current sample Advance to first earliest sample G Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample G9 Hold Select RS232C SET UP menu G3 Print current data sample if equipped with RS232C I F Cartridge or TECH 1 Series A and printer Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to Snapshot Options menu Suzuki Aftermarke
87. to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and SPARK ADVANCE To do so scroll through the preassigned pairs with the and key until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED Fix the ENGINE SPEED by pressing the a key if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter or the key if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or key until SPARK ADVANCE is displayed FIXES TOP PARAMETER DESIRED IDLE 850 RPM ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM DESIRED IDLE 850 RPM FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER RELEASE A FIXED PARAMETER If the top parameter has been fixed with the key press to release it and proceed scrolling through the preassigned data parameter pairs Likewise if ail has been pressed to fix the bottom parameter press to release it PRINTING DATA The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer To print the data press a The tester keyboard is disabled while data is being sent to the printer Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 107 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application NOTE The RS232C I F Cartridge is required if you are using a TECH 1 tester SELECT MODE Y FO DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S EGR TEMP 56 C 132 F EGR COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F I
88. to the NOTE on page 253 2 For 4WD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press to select the Hydraulic Control Test 4 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Hydraulic Functional Test and instructs you to raise the wheel to be tested When the wheel has been raised press the key 5 If the parking brake is on the tester will tell you to release it If the parking brake is released within 10 seconds the tester automatically continues to the Select Channel menu If the parking brake is not released within 10 seconds or if the red telltale light remains on even when the parking brake is released the tester instructs you to release the parking brake or correct the cause of the red telltale staying on When the problem is resolved the tester displays the Select Channel menu 6 Choose the wheel you wish to test from the Select Channel menu 7 When a wheel has been selected the tester instructs you to place the transmission in neutral then firmly depress the brake pedal Do not release the pedal until the tester instructs you to do so 8 Have an assistant try to spin the wheel selected It should not spin This is to verify base brake apply 9 Press the key to start the test The tester will display RELEASE on the screen and your assistant should be able to spin the wheel selected This verifies ABS brake pressure release The tester will then display HOLD on the screen and a countdown
89. transferred to a computer for further analysis or displayed on a terminal The SNAPSHOT data will be retained within the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle However IF YOU POWER UP THE TESTER WITHOUT A MASTER CARTRIDGE OR WITH A DIFFERENT MASTER CARTRIDGE THE SNAPSHOT DATA WILL BE LOST CAUTION Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 183 3 Operating Precautions BCM Application REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED You should not remove or install master or auxiliary cartridges while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running If you wish to change or add a cartridge do the following 1 Disconnect the power plug 2 Install the cartridge CAUTION 3 Reconnect the power plug If the tester does not appear to be functioning properly reset the tester by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Disconnect the power plug 3 Remove all cartridges from the tester 4 Connect the power plug to the tester 5 When MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING is displayed disconnect the power plug 6 Install the cartridge 7 Reconnect the power plug Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 184 4 SELECTING THE VEHICLE When you have selected a language see page 182 the next step is to select a system to test SELECTING THE SYSTEM The tester displays the systems available for testing Press the key listed to
90. until an RS232 SETUP menu is displayed Press ai to enable the Screen Print function Refer to the appropriate Operators Manual for more detail 12 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press to return to the Snapshot Options menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press again to return to the select mode menu ACTIVE KEYS G Scroll through displayed data parameters Scroll through selected samples Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively 2 Display trouble codes for current sample Advance to first earliest sample Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample hold Select RS232C Set Up menu G3 Print current data sample if equipped with RS232C I F Cartridge or Tech 1A Series A and printer Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to Snapshot Options menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 208 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 ANY CODE Review previously F1 SINGLE CODE captured data F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA YES o More Data Parameters SET UP PHASE T SNAPSHOT MODE SNAPSHOT See Steps 1 3 ENTER ECU CODE ENTER TROUBLE TO TRIGGER ON XX or CODE XXXX THEN PRESS ENTER DTC ENTER DATA VEHICLE SPEED CAPTURE
91. used for the shift solenoid control in the TCM Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 224 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS BATTERY VOLTAGE Volts 0 0 25 4 Battery Voltage is an analog input signal read by the TCM MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 4WD L SWITCH Off On 4WD L signal is fed to the TCM from the 4WD L switch This switch signal is used for timing of shift change BRAKE SWITCH Off On This switch signal informs the TCM whether the brake is active or not GEAR POSITION STATES This parameter indicates the current gear position It is computed by the throttle position coming from the ECM and the vehicle speed MODE SELECT SWITCH Normal Power Snow The Mode signal is fed to the TCM from the Mode Select Switch This switch signal is used for timing of the shift change O D OFF SWITCH CON CONTROL MON MONITOR Off On O D Off Switch is used for the over drive control When this signal is ON the gear position is not shifted to Ath PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SIGNAL R D 2 L or P N This parameter indicates whether the D R 2 L range position is selected or if P N range is selected When this signal is ON the idle speed is increased Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 225 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application SHIFT SOLENOID NO 1 SHIFT SOLENOID NO 2 Off On Shift Solenoid is used for shifting the transmission up and down It is turned ON o
92. using harsh solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents Benzene Trichloroethylene etc Although the tester is water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off your tester prior to storage Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 299 A IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM This section is intended to help you get back on track if the tester appears to be operating abnormally Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause No power is applied to the tester Other Possible Causes Tester power supply is malfunctioning Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 300 A If You re Having A Problem ABS Airbag Application DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause e Cartridge was inserted while power was applied to the tester Other Possible Causes Two master cartridges are installed Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Make sure that only one master cartridge is installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try ins
93. 001 JSAEGC11W00140001 13 SY415 JSAEGA31S00140001 GA31S 140001 SY416 JSAEGB31S00140001 GC31S 140001 JSAEGC31S00140001 GC31S 140001 JSAEGC31SV5140001 GD31S 140001 JSAEGC31SW0140001 JS2GA31S W5140001 JSAEGD31S00140001 JS2GB31S W5 140001 JSAEGC31W00140001 JSAEGC31WW0140001 JSAEGD31W00140001 24 50416 JSAFTA03V00150001 JS3TA03V 14150001 44 50420 JSAFTA03V10150001 JS3TA52V 14150001 JSAFTA03V14150001 JS3TL52V14150001 JSAFTA52V00150001 2S2GTA03C00470001 JSAFTAS2V 14150001 282GTA03C10470001 JSAFTL52V00150001 282GTA03C16470001 JSAFTL52V10150001 283TA03C16100001 JSAFTL52V14150001 283TA52C16100001 2S2GTA52C00470001 282GTA52C10470001 25 SQ625 JSAFTD62V00150001 JS3TD62V 14150001 43 JSAFTD62V10150001 JSAFTD62V14150001 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 87 Suzuki ECM Application Description ECM OBD 1 Application ECU MODEL FOR EUROPEAN FOR OTHER NO MARKETS MARKETS 32 SN413V JSAFJA43V00100001 JS3JB43V 14100001 4l JSAFJB43V00100001 JSAFJB43VY0100001 JSAFJB43V14100001 NORTH AMERICAN MARKET 1991 1995 MODEL ENGINE 60 ECU MFG PeU REMARKS TYPE TYPE NO SE416 TBI ECM MITSUBISHI SFI ECM MITSUBISHI 3 SF series TBI Bypass Air ECM DENSO 4 Type TBI Throttle ECM DENSO 5 Position Type SW series TBI ECM DENSO 5 SY series MFI ECM DENSO 5 HOW THE SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE VETRONIX TESTER The tester lets you monitor data and control ECM or PCM
94. 178 2 Getting Started BCM Application MTS 3100 MASTERTECH 4 Application Cartridge ke TEN DLC Cable GM 12 14 Pin DLC Adapter FIGURE 2 1 MTS 3100 Adapter and Cables Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 179 2 Getting Started BCM Application TECH 1A TECH 1A 14 26 gt 26 26 DLC Cable Application GM 12 14 or Cartridge 12 26 Pin Adapter DC Power Cable FIGURE 2 2 Tech 1A Adapter and Cables Using the 12 Pin DLC Master Cartridge FIGURE 2 3 Tech 1A Adapter and Cables Using the 16 Pin DLC Type Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 180 2 Getting Started BCM Application TECH 1 Application Cartridge FIGURE 2 4 Tech 1 Cables Before operating the Suzuki BCM Application do the following 1 Insert the Suzuki BCM Application Cartridge into the bottom slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 or into the back slot of the MTS 3100 Verify that no other master cartridge is installed in the top slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 2 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 3 Locate the vehicle s serial Data Link Connector DLC and identify which type it is 12 pin or 16 pin The vehicle DLC is usually under the dash on the driver s side Refer to the vehicle service manual if you are in doubt 4 Connect the cable to the tester as shown in the preceding figures 5 Plug the cable into the vehicle s 12 pin or 16 pin DLC 6 Turn the ignition switch on 7 Verify
95. 3100 Verify that no other master cartridge is installed in the top slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 244 2 Getting Started ABS Airbag Application NOTE If diagnosing an ABS DBC7 system the OBD II Interface Cartridge P N 09932 66530 must be installed in the top slot along with the master cartridge in the bottom slot 2 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 3 Locate the vehicle s serial Data Link Connector DLC The vehicle DLC is usually under the dash on the driver s side Refer to the vehicle service manual if you are in doubt 4 Connect the cable to the tester as shown in the preceding figures 5 Plug the cable into the vehicle s DLC 6 Turn the ignition switch on 7 Verify that the tester displays the screen below SUZUKI MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE VX X lt ENTER gt 8 Press AUi to display the APPLICATIONS menu APPLICATIONS Y F0 ECM F1 BCM F2 ABS AIRBAG Press the key to the left of ABS AIRBAG from the APPLICATIONS menu If more than three applications are available use or to scroll the display 9 Verify that the tester displays the screen below then press SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG X X FOR DELCO DELPHI ENTER In the display is incorrect refer to Appendix A If the tester display informs you that the companion application is missing contact your tester distributor Then proceed to Chapter 4 Suzuki Aftermarket
96. 4 To clear stored trouble codes press the 19 9 key to go to Clear Codes Phase The tester will display EXECUTE CLEAR CODES Press to clear the codes or press Qe to return to the trouble code display without clearing the codes When is pressed the tester displays a CLEARING CODES message followed by either a CODES CLEARED or a CODES NOT CLEARED message After a few seconds the tester automatically starts displaying trouble codes again If no trouble codes are present the NO CODES screen is displayed When the QY 9 key is pressed the trouble codes are retained in the ECU and the tester starts displaying trouble codes again LAMP CLEAR AND LOCK CLEAR FOR AIR BAG SYSTEM FOR ECU NO 3 MADE BY SIEMENS For the Airbag system after the trouble codes are displayed press GMA to return to the Trouble Codes menu Lamp Clear Select F1 Lamp Clear from the Trouble Codes menu then NOTE press when the tester asks if you wish to clear the Warning Lamp The tester attempts to clear the codes and informs you if the clearing was successful If the Warning Lamp was not cleared the tester informs you and instructs you to replace the SDM Press to return to the Trouble Codes menu Lock Clear Select F2 Lock Clear from the Trouble Codes menu press when the tester asks if you wish to clear the Near Deploy Lock The tester attempts to clear the Near Deploy Lock then informs you if the clearing was successful or not If t
97. 8 PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS The tester is capable of displaying a wide variety of data parameters in Data List and Snapshot modes The ECU sends the tester information regarding the state of the ECU and the tester translates and displays this information in the form of parameters selected by the service technician This chapter describes those parameters There are two basic types of ECU parameters discrete and analog Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of two distinct states ON OFF OPEN CLOSED etc Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate units Examples of analog parameters include Vehicle Speed Throttle Position Battery Voltage etc Parameters are grouped by ECU function The parameters are listed in alphabetical order within each category The categories are General Electrical Miscellaneous CATEGORY DESCRIPTIONS General Parameters are those that affect or are affected by many different ECU systems such as Vehicle Speed Coolant Temp Signal and Wheel Speed Electrical Parameters can be used to help diagnose vehicle electrical problems and include Battery Voltage and Pump Motor Voltage The Miscellaneous Parameters section includes parameters such as Brake Switch Warning Lamp and Gear Position Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 221 8 Parameter Des
98. A Rear Axle F8 F9 APPLY RELEASE Once you have selected a function to test use the corresponding keys from the chart to turn the function ON or OFF During a motor apply or a motor release the command and feedback currents for that motor are sampled Those samples can be replayed immediately after the motor is turned off During solenoid tests pressing the key turns ON the COMMAND and pressing the key turns it OFF or it will go to OFF after 5 seconds have elapsed If INHIBITED appears on the display when trying to turn ON the COMMAND from OFF wait until it disappears To select a different function to test you can either press 3X to return to the function selection menu to choose a different test or just press the function key for the test you want to perform 7 Press XI to return to the Manual Control Test menu Press again to display the Select Test menu When you exit from the Manual Control test the tester will rehome the motors and display a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed ACTIVE KEYS Select Manual Control test Select function to control 686 Advance to first earliest sample Advance to last most recent sample 96 8 6898 Turn function ON scroll through selected samples Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 275 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application ACTIVE KEYS Continued Turn f
99. AC ISC control in the ECM or PCM ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE BATTERY VOLTAGE EET V Battery Positive Voltage is an analog input signal read by the ECM or PCM This parameter is used for voltage correction of the fuel injection quantity ELECTRIC LOAD ON OFF The electrical system load affects the engine load which causes variations in engine speed The Electric Load parameter will read ON or OFF depending on the state of certain electrical components such as the radiator fan motor head lights parking lights blower fan motor rear defogger brake lights etc The ECM or PCM uses the ON or OFF signal to compensate for variations in engine load by controlling the IAC valve ISC motor SPARK CONTROL PARAMETERS IGNITION ADVANCE SPARK ADVANCE DEGREES The Ignition Spark Advance angle references cylinder 1 top dead center It is calculated by comparing the relationship between the crankshaft position sensor Ne and crankshaft position sensor G signals The two missing teeth on the Ne timing rotor identify 1 cylinder TDC The G signal identifies the approach of the 1 cylinder compression stroke occurring at 90 BTDC IGNITION TIMING LEVEL ON OFF This parameter indicates which ignition timing adjust resistor is installed The function of an ignition timing adjust resistor is to correct basic ignition timing advance If no adjust resistor is installed in the vehicle 225 appears here
100. ACTIVE KEYS Start the test Select a menu item Proceed to the next screen Stop the test or return to the Select Mode menu Continue with test o Indicate failure Continue with test Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 212 6 FINISHING UP To get the most life out of your diagnostic tool after using the Suzuki BCM Application do the following 1 Remove power to the tester by disconnecting the serial data link cable from the serial data link connector You may want to inspect the cable and connector for any damage or corrosion 2 Unplug the cartridge and store it and the cable in the travelling case If the tester should become dirty you may wipe it off with a clean cloth CAUTION and mild detergent or hand soap Avoid using harsh solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents Benzene Trichloroethylene etc Although the tester is water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester prior to storage Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 213 7 TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTIONS All trouble codes that can be displayed with the Suzuki BCM Application along with a brief description of each code are listed on the following pages TRANSMISSION TROUBLE CODES ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE 17 SHIFT SOL NO 1 Actual gear position ratio does not agree with gear positi
101. AGNETIC CLUTCH ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C magnetic clutch control signal ON is indicated when the A C compressor is operating signal is outputting and OFF when the A C compressor is not operating signal is not outputting A C PRESSURE SWITCH ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C dual pressure switch SWITCH ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C ON signal which is input to the ECM or PCM ON is displayed when all of the A C related switches A C switch fan switch pressure switch etc are turned ON OFF is displayed when one of the above switches is turned OFF Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 165 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application BLOWER FAN SWITCH STATES This parameter indicates the state of the blower fan motor switch BRAKE SWITCH ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the Brake Switch HEATER FAN ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the heater fan motor switch RADIATOR FAN STATES This parameter indicates the state of the Radiator Fan STARTER ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the starter signal Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 166 A IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM Although the tester was designed to give you years of trouble free service occasional problems may occur that require special attention Some of these problems may be corrected with a
102. AIL Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor or EGRT SENSOR OPEN circuit open 51 EGR VALVE EGR valve circuit open CIRCUIT OPEN 52 INJECTOR FAIL Fuel Injector failure 53 ECM WRONG Improper ECM installation ASSEMBLY ECM other than California USA Version installed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 145 7 DTCs ECM OBD I Application ECM TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR 53 GND CIRCUIT OPEN Ground circuit for 1991 93 California spec vehicle ECM WRONG ASSEM is open Wrong ECM installed in a 1994 USA spec vehicle 61 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift solenoid No 1 circuit open NO 1 OPEN 62 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift solenoid No 1 circuit short NO 1 SHORT 63 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift solenoid No 2 circuit open NO 2 OPEN 64 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift solenoid No 2 circuit short NO 2 SHORT 65 TCC SOLENOID Torque Converter Clutch circuit open OPEN 65 PRESS REGULATOR Pressure Regulator circuit open SOLENOID OPEN 66 PRESS REGULATOR Pressure Regulator circuit short SOLENOID SHORT 66 TCC SOLENOID Torque Converter Clutch circuit short SHORT 72 TRANS RANGE Transmission Range switch failure SWITCH FAIL 75 VSS TRANS Signal of the Vehicle Speed Sensor in transmission NO SIGNAL not received by ECM or PCM 76 INPUT SHAFT Input Shaft Speed Sensor failure SPEED SEN FAIL 127 ECU FAULT ECU internal failure Suzuki Afterma
103. AIR TEMP the trigger 40 C 104 F 1 occured More Data Samples after the trigger 9 Use the and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if not enough time was allowed for data capture before or after the trigger You can advance directly to the first last or trigger sample with the press of a button F4 Display first earliest sample F5 Display trigger sample 0 F6 Display last most recent sample 10 While in the data display phase pressing ils will cause the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 16 ENTER COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F 3 4 Sample Time Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 119 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 6 seconds means the sample was received 2 6 seconds before
104. AMETERS In order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time the tester displays data parameters in preassigned pairs A typical first data pair which would be displayed after you press af is shown in the figure below Also shown is how to scroll through the Data List with the keys and how to create your own data pairs with the and keys To see other preassigned pairs press either the or key The key will cause the tester to scroll forward through the list of preassigned pairs while the Qs key will cause scrolling backwards Chapter 8 contains descriptions of all engine data parameters Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 106 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S BAROMETRIC PRESS 100mmHg VEHICLE SPEED 0 kps 0 mph COOLANT TEMP DESIRED IDLE 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 797 RPM CLOSED THROT POS ON CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs which are different from the preassigned pairs Any two parameters can be displayed as a pair by simply scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed To fix the top parameter press Gj an asterisk will appear by the fixed parameter Press to fix the lower parameter The tester will not allow both the top and bottom parameters
105. ATTERY VOLTAGE Battery supply voltage input is too low SENSING CKT MALF LOW VOLTAGE 21 TP SENSOR Throttle position sensor signal voltage too high VOLTAGE HIGH Throttle position sensor or circuit failure 22 TP SENSOR Throttle position sensor signal voltage too low VOLTAGE LOW Throttle position sensor or circuit failure 22 GLOW PLUG Glow plug control monitor voltage low when FEEDBK CKT MALF control voltage should be high LOW VOLTAGE 23 IAT SENSOR Intake air temperature too low Intake air OR CIRCUIT OPEN temperature sensor or circuit open 23 GLOW PLUG Glow plug control circuit open or short to power CONTROL CKT MALF supply circuit OPEN CIRCUIT 23 GLOW PLUG Glow plug control circuit short to ground CONTROL CKT MALF SHORT CIRCUIT 24 VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor signal not received by the NO SIGNAL ECM or PCM Vehicle speed sensor circuit failure 24 VSS METER Vehicle Speed Sensor signal from the Meter Cluster NO SIGNAL not received by the ECM or PCM 25 IAT SENSOR Intake air temperature too high OR CIRCUIT SHORT Intake air temperature sensor or circuit short Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 143 7 DTCs ECM OBD 1 Application ECM TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR 26 OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Bank 2 Oxygen Sensor or Circuit malfunction OR CIRCUIT FAIL 31 MAP SENSOR Manifold Absolute Pressure se
106. Aftermarket Application Page 216 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application ABS TROUBLE CODES CONTINUED ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE C1035 LR WHEEL SPEED Left rear wheel speed sensor or its circuit has failed SENSOR FAIL 36 LR WHEEL SPEED Left rear wheel speed sensor or circuit short SENSOR SHORT Unusual data is detected C1036 LR WHEEL SPEED Left rear wheel speed sensor signal input is abnormal SEN SIGNAL FAIL 41 RF SOLENOID FAIL A failure condition is detected in the right front solenoid 41 or C1041 RF INLET Monitor voltage of RF inlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 42 or C1042 RF OUTLET Monitor voltage of RF outlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 45 LF SOLENOID A failure condition is detected in the left front solenoid FAIL 45 or C1045 LF INLET Monitor voltage of LF inlet solenoid and the CPU command fail SOLENOID FAIL to agree 46 or C1046 LF OUTLET Monitor voltage of LF outlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 51 RR SOLENOID FAIL A failure condition is detected in the right rear solenoid 4 CHANNEL ONLY 51 or C1051 RR INLET Monitor voltage of RR inlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree 52 or C1052 RR OUTLET Monitor voltage of RR outlet solenoid and the CPU command SOLENOID FAIL fail to agree
107. B or will then manually scroll the menu How to use the CARB MODE test modes is explained in Chapter 6 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 13 4 Selecting The Model Year Communications Mode amp Test Mode ECM OBD II Application SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS MENU FOR F1 SUZUKI MODE The first three test modes are shown as soon as the vehicle is selected The other test modes will automatically scroll onto the display after three seconds The display will automatically scroll between the two or three screens To stop the automatic scrolling press either the or key The menu may then be manually changed by pressing either the or key All multiple menus of more than three items scroll in this way Regardless of which test modes are displayed any test mode can be selected at any time from the menu SELECT MODE v F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F3 SNAPSHOT SELECTMODE VA F4 MISC TESTS F5 ECU ID Not available for all ECUs MISCELLANEOUS TESTS FOR SUZUKI MODE The Suzuki Mode F4 Misc Test menu item is used to select a submenu of tests Pressing displays the miscellaneous tests available for the selected vehicle To return to the Select Mode menu just press 2419 A list of the miscellaneous tests available is included in the following section SELECT MODE MENU How to use the SUZUKI MODE test modes is explained in Chapter 5 SELECT MODE yA SELECTMODE YA F0 DATA LIST F3 SNAPSHOT F1 PRINT DATA F4 MISC TEST
108. BS Airbag Application General Key Functions Continued 7 Scroll through test mode selection menus and control display of captured data For some device control tests the up down arrows turn the function ON or OFF 0 O Designate trouble codes G Select and control test mode G3 Print Data List parameters ENTER Enter designated trouble code Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 240 2 GETTING STARTED SETTING UP THE TESTER The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter or adapter cable for the vehicle being tested must be connected to the tester DLC Cable in order to connect the tester to the vehicle The following Vehicle Adapter Chart identifies which adapters and cables are required to connect each type of tester to the various Suzuki vehicles All adapters cables and any other hardware required to connect the tester to the vehicle are listed in the chart The figure number in the chart refers to the adapter and cable illustrations on the following pages SYSTEM TESTER ADAPTER DESCRIPTION FIGURE ABS Delphi MTS 3100 Type 3 16 14 Pin P N 02001969 Figure 2 1 Brake Control 7 OBD II compliant with 16 Pin 7 Connector Tech 1A Type 3 16 14 Pin P N 02001969 Figure 2 2 OBD II OBD II I F Cartridge P N 02002178 Tech 1 OBD II VIM P N 02001808 Figure 2 3 16 24 Pin VIM Adapter Cable P N 02001744 ABS Airbag MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin P N 02001364 Figure 2 4 with 12 Pin Connector Te
109. Battery Voltage Electric Load e Fuel Delivery Parameters describe the ECM or PCM fuel control system in action After the engine has warmed up the ECM or PCM controls the air fuel mixture ratio based on the values of certain engine Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 147 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application sensor inputs Examples of such inputs include Intake Air Temperature and Pressure and Oxygen Sensor Voltage The output signals of the fuel control system depend on the fuel delivery system Spark Control Parameters are associated with spark timing calculations Engine sensor values are used by the ECM or PCM to increase or decrease retard spark advance Emissions amp Driveability refer to all parameters that are related to improvements in performance or air pollution reduction Systems included are Idle Air Control Idle Speed Control Exhaust Gas Recirculation Evaporative Emission Control Transmission Parameters represent signals from the transmission to the ECM or PCM The Miscellaneous Parameters include the states of various switches DESCRIPTOR FORMAT Following is a description of every parameter that can be displayed with the Suzuki ECM Application Included is 1 a listing of all the parameters available for each category 2 a description and the units of the analog parameters GENERAL Calc Load Charging Efficiency ECT Sensor Voltage Engine Coolant Tem
110. C1016 STOP LAMP SWITCH Stop lamp switch open CIRCUIT OPEN 18 SENSOR ROTOR FAIL ABS control time error is detected in the sensor rotor of one of the four wheels 21 RF WHEEL SPEED Right front wheel speed sensor or circuit open SENSOR OPEN Unusual data is detected C1021 RF WHEEL SPEED Right front wheel speed sensor or circuit has failed SENSOR FAIL 22 RF WHEEL SPEED Right front wheel speed sensor or circuit short SENSOR SHORT Unusual data is detected C1022 RF WHEEL SPEED Right front wheel speed sensor signal input is abnormal SEN SIGNAL FAIL 25 LF WHEEL SPEED Left front wheel speed sensor or circuit open SENSOR OPEN Unusual data is detected C1025 LF WHEEL SPEED Left front wheel speed sensor or its circuit has failed SENSOR FAIL 26 LF WHEEL SPEED Left front wheel speed sensor or circuit short SENSOR SHORT Unusual data is detected C1026 LF WHEEL SPEED Left front wheel speed sensor signal input is abnormal SEN SIGNAL FAIL C1031 RR WHEEL SPEED Right rear wheel speed sensor or its circuit has failed SENSOR FAIL 31 RR WHEEL SPEED Right rear wheel speed sensor or circuit open SENSOR OPEN Unusual data is detected 32 RR WHEEL SPEED Right rear wheel speed sensor or circuit short SENSOR SHORT Unusual data is detected C1032 RR WHEEL SPEED Right rear wheel speed sensor signal input is abnormal SEN SIGNAL FAIL 35 LR WHEEL SPEED Left rear wheel speed sensor or circuit open SENSOR OPEN Unusual data is detected Suzuki
111. COOLANT TEMP SNAPSHOT OPTIONS SNAPSHOT MODE 40 C 104 F F0 ANY DTC ENTER DTC INTAKE AIR TEMP F1 SINGLE DTC TO TRIGGER ON XX 40 C 104 C F2 MANUAL TRIG THEN PRESS ENTER F3 REPLAY DATA ENTER CODE THEN PRESS ENTER J DATA CAPTURE COOLANT TEMP PHASE 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 C YES NOJ More Data Parameters Data Capture Phase 4 Once the trigger condition is specified the tester begins storing engine or transmission data parameters and DTC s while displaying the Data List parameters 5 The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter as well as all DTC s are saved for each sample The data display will indicate the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the key can always be used to force a trigger Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 117 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 104F T 40 C 104F Waiting for Trigger Trigger Occurs Data Display Phase 6 Once the trigger occurs the tester will continue to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a flashing
112. D 94 REMOVING OR CHANGING MASTER CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT Iu e prn ERUIT 94 4 SELECTING THE VEHICLE _ o5 SELECTING A COMMUNICATION MODE eee 95 SELECTING A VEHICLE TYPE Re Pd xe Ra as 95 SELECTING A TRANSMISSION TYPE RR RES 96 SELECTING THE TESI MODES cs iicisdicte bees ee ROORR UO Ea RE o Reds 96 Applicable Communication Mode Other Than North American Market 97 North American Market 1991 1993 as ais a AG 98 SELECTING THE VEHICLE sciisexthehreRkesdRb4edxAeG ud 99 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES 100 SELECTING TEST MODES 101 Man Ten MURUS duda pad dks ee dd Bid d A RADNA 102 ECM for PCM Communications Status Displays nk oder nes bes eee 104 MODE FY DATA LIST 106 Wewing Dag PROM canada bes ds ART AALSOEARPRERSODARER AR AHORA HG A 106 Create Tom Own Data PENES aa dde d aad aie daa dad d aded d moana 107 Rellene A Fed POPUP dubai CAPE X Nod d eens 107 edhe seeds edd pd Eo war Ga 107 PRINT DATA b ReueREGORERGGRERGIGSRERGGK Rd e RR 108 Fam Dol crm 108 MODE FZ DIAS
113. DM PASSENGER INITIATOR RESISTANCE PASSENGER AIRBAG INITIATOR RESISTANCE Ohms Q 0 12 75 This parameter indicates the resistance of the passenger s airbag initiator circuit PASSENGER PRETENSIONER INITIATOR RESISTANCE Ohms This parameter indicates the resistance of the passenger s seatbelt pretensioner initiator circuit SYSTEM ID STATES Airbag ID Driver Passenger Driver Only Pretensioner ID Driver Passenger This parameter indicates where the airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are installed SYSTEM ID FOR ECU NO 28 1CH ACH This parameter indicates the number of initiator circuits Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 228 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS WARNING LAMP Off On This parameter tells whether the warning lamp is ON or OFF Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 229 A IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM Although the tester was designed to give you years of trouble free service occasional problems may occur that require special attention Some of these problems may be corrected with a few simple steps Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem If the problem appears to be in the tester perform the Self test described in the t
114. E XH PS 10 SEBLECTINGAMOGDEL bee e nki Y OR RR PR E D 11 SELECTING A COMMUNICATIONS 11 F0 CARB INITIALIZATION OF COMMUNICATIONS 12 COMMUNICATION FAILURE issues ER 12 SELECTING THE TEST MODES o bLERPRVRPPRCUCRERPGDERQOGOCREODEREASA PRESA 12 SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS MENU FOR CARB MODE 13 SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS MENU FOR F1 SUZUKI MODE 14 MISCELLANEOUS TESTS FOR SUZUKI MODE 14 Select Mode MORE obsides ET EC PUR sped ded 14 Select TUUS rer rr RRR pd ned 15 Select Mode Menu for SQ Series 57418 and JA627 _ 15 MACEN ONS TESS qued Gow ide vd temque adieq eu de 15 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC i 3 OPERATING THE TEST MODES IN SUZUKI MODE 16 PISSUZUKRIMOLDE lose RR RERO HORRORE RH FR UR ODE ee ER AUR Red d ed b dos 16 Suzuki Mode ECM Communications Status Displays _ 18 MODE FDATA LIST TE AVE r TEPEN 19 Create Jour Own Dala FUS amp 205480 AG LABELER ARE DRE UOCE odd 19 MODE FI PRINT DATA 21 PEE METE EEEE PE coma E T EEEE E AAEE E TE 21 MODE Fk SNAPSHOT PEETI E O REG ET i 22 K
115. ECM OBD II Application IAC CAL The purpose of the IAC CAL mode is to adjust the duty of the IAC valve to a certain value at idle speed This is done by adjusting the Idle adjustment screw in the throttle body The IAC CAL mode allows monitoring of engine data parameters in a manner identical to that in the DATA LIST mode To operate the AC CAL mode do the following 1 Press or EF to position the on the display menu next to IAC CAL then press M3 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Misc Test menu 3 Block the wheels shift to Park and set the parking brake 4 Make sure the vehicle is in Park with the parking brake engaged start the engine unless it is already running Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C 5 Press to begin the test 6 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while operating in the IAC CAL mode Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys The letters IAC appearing at the end of line two of the display indicate that the valve is being controlled At the end of line four of the display CAL Calibrated Air will be displayed If the tester detects any of the following conditions IAC CAL mode will be terminated e Vehicle speed Coolant temperature is below 80 C CTP switch o
116. EGR control value while viewing parameters Decrease STEPPING EGR control value while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu SOV TEST The SOV Shut Off Valve test mode allows you to check whether the valve turns on and off To select the SOV Test mode in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Confirm that the engine is stopped 2 Select the SOV Test mode from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 3 Disconnect the immobilizer coupler at the immobilizer control module and then press 4 Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON again and then press 5 Wait three seconds for the SOV control to be enabled 6 Press to initiate the SOV Test 7 When the test has concluded the tester will either display CONTINUE or it will show one of four screens The COMPLETE WITHOUT ERROR screen indicates that the SOV has been controlled The FAIL WITHOUT ERROR screen indicates that SOV has not been controlled due to the fuel pump immobilizer control module code not being matched The COMPLETE WITH ERROR screen indicates that the SOV has not been controlled due to a fault in the SOV The FAIL WITH ERROR screen indicates that the SOV has not been controlled due to a fault in the SOV and the fuel pump immobilizer control module code was not found either DISCONNECT IMMOBI COUPLER AT IMMOBI CONT Y Roo Wir TURN IG OFF AND THEN ON Y ru am WAIT 3 SECONDS le v SOV
117. EN ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Move to the next section of the Print Data function VIN entry keys hold Select RS232C Set Up menu Terminate the Print Data mode and return to the select mode menu MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes or diagnostic codes are set by the ECU when an abnormal condition is detected They are a key to diagnosing many of the problems which can occur in the vehicle The F2 mode allows you quick access to trouble codes for initial vehicle checks and to check that a repair procedure has been successful NOTE EH Trouble codes can also be displayed in Snapshot replay mode To access the Trouble Codes do the following NOTE When checking and clearing trouble codes be sure to follow instructions in the Service Manual or correct reading or clearing of the DTC s may not occur 1 Press to select the TROUBLE CODES mode from the Select Mode menu The tester informs you if no trouble codes are present Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 198 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application AIRBAG SYSTEM NOTE 3j FOR ECU NO 3 MADE BY SIEMENS When testing the Airbag system the following menu is displayed TROUBLE CODES F0 DISPLAY CODES F1 LAMP CLEAR F2 LOCK CLEAR Press to display the Airbag system codes Press clear the Airbag Warning Lamp Press to clear the Near Deploy Lock 2 When
118. G FOR DATA TURN KEY TO RUN ECU SELECTED NO DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT ECU NO RESPONSE SERIAL DATA FAIL NORMAL PROCESS CHECK DATA LINK IS NOT AND RESELECT POSSIBLE EXIT EXIT EXIT Display A means that the tester has not yet received a complete data message from the ECU This display is sometimes seen right after selecting a test mode Display B is a reminder that the ignition key needs to be in the RUN position for the tester to communicate with the vehicle Displays C and F occur when the tester has not received any data from the selected ECU In this case you should verify that the ignition is ON and check the serial data link connections Displays D and E occur when communication with a vehicle has failed after communication has already been established Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 192 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application If display C or D appears when the ABS control module is selected the probable cause is a stop in the communication function on the ABS control module To correct the problem perform either of the following two steps NOTE 1 Use a service wire to short between the diagnostic switch terminal of the diagnostic 2 monitor coupler for the ABS and the ground terminal of the diagnostic 1 monitor coupler Refer to the applicable service manual for the location of each terminal position 2 Spin one of the four wheels If the problem persists refer to Tes
119. HOME SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F2 DTC INFO F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F2 DTC CODES SELECT MODE YA F4 MISC TEST ACTIVE KEYS Select System to Test NO EXIT Select vehicle Return to previous step Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 250 4 Selecting The System ABS Airbag Application SELECT MODE MENU FOR ABS DBC7 Once a system is selected the tester displays the Select Mode menu Detailed instructions for selecting and operating the various test modes are provided in Chapter 5 of this manual SELECT MODE Y F0 DATALIST F2 DTC INFO F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT MODE Y F4 MISC TEST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 251 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES SELECTING THE TEST MODES After selecting the system to test the tester displays a Select Mode menu Since all of the test modes cannot be displayed on the tester at the same time the tester automatically sequences between all pages of the menu To stop the automatic scrolling press or key The menu may then be scrolled manually with the and keys To select a test mode press the tester key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu Regardless of which test modes are displayed any test mode can be selected from the menu TEST MODES AVAILABLE Once a test mode is selected operation begins The following test modes are avail
120. ING THE MODEL If you are testing the AIRBAG system the tester asks you to select a model Press the key to the left of the model year you are testing SELECT MODEL F0 SW SERIES F1 SE416 SZ416 F2 SQ SERIES SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR If you are testing the SW series model the tester asks you if the model year is 1995 Press if the vehicle you are testing is a 95 or press Qe if the vehicle is not a 95 SW SERIES MODEL YEAR 95 YES NO Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 249 4 Selecting The System ABS Airbag Application SELECT MODE MENU Once a system is selected the tester displays the Select Mode menu Detailed instructions for selecting and operating the various test modes are provided in Chapter 5 of this manual SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG X X FOR DELCO DELPHI ENTER ENTER SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F2 AIRBAG SELECT ABS TYPE F0 2WD 4WSS F1 2WD 3WSS F2 4WD 3WSS SELECT MODEL F0 SW SERIES F1 SE416 SZ416 F2 SQ SERIES F3 4WD 4WSS SW SERIES MODEL YEAR 95 YES NO ALWAYS DO AIRBAG DIAG SYS CHECK IN S M AIRBAG SYS SECTION W310 413 YES NO SELECT MODE yA F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC HISTORY F2 DTC S SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODES ALWAYS DO AIRBAG DIAG SYS CHECK IN S M AIRBAG SYS SECTION SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 MOTOR RE
121. IR DTC 21 CURRENT SIR DTC 25 HISTORY CLEAR DTC s DTC s CLEARED 2 Seconds FIGURE 5 3 Example of MODE F2 DTC Display amp Clearing for Airbag Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 264 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application ABS DTC DISPLAY DTC 56 CURRENT LEFT FRONT ABS MOTOR CIRCUIT OPEN DTC 61 CURRENT RIGHT FRONT ABS MOTOR CIRCUIT OPEN DTC ISOLATION POSSIBLE SOURCE OF MALFUNCTION FOLLOWS 4 Secs DTC ISOLATION REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL FOR VEH DIAGNOSIS REPAIR 4 Secs DTC 64 CURRENT REAR ABS MOTOR CIRCUIT OPEN DTC ISOLATION MULTIPLE ABS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTC ISOLATION DTC 56 61 64 MOTOR CIRCUIT CONNECTOR OPEN ABS DTC CLEAR FIGURE 5 4 Example of ABS Fault Isolation Code Clearing 7a ABS After all DTCs and ABS fault isolation messages ABS VI have been displayed the tester prompts you to CLEAR DTC s If you press you leave the TROUBLE CODE mode without clearing the codes 7b AIRBAG To clear all stored DTCs on the vehicle press 1 to go to the Clear DTC s Phase for SQ Series AIRBAG press zzi to go to the Clear DTC s Phase When CLEAR DTC s is displayed press to clear the DTCs or press for not clearing them 8a ABS VI If you press the following message is displayed on the tester HISTORY DATA WILL BE LOST CLEAR DTC s If you are testing
122. M IS NOT NO RESPONSE NO DATA POSSIBLE CHECK ALDL EXIT EXIT CONNECTION C oo ow cM Display A This means that the tester cannot yet display data as it has not yet received a complete data message from the ECM or PCM This display is sometimes seen right after selecting a test mode Display B This is a reminder that the ignition key needs to be in the RUN position for the tester to communicate with the vehicle Display C This occurs when the tester determines that the data stream it receives from the ECM or PCM does not match the vehicle that you have selected If this happens return to the vehicle select step by pressing 2 419 Double check your selection Display D and 1 This occurs when the tester has not received any data from the ECM or PCM In this case you should verify that the ignition is ON and check the serial data link connections and then return to the vehicle select step by pressing 3489 Double check your selection An incorrect engine type selection may also cause this condition DISPLAY G and I This occurs when communication with a vehicle has failed after communication has already been established DISPLAY F Ifthis screen flashes for more than 10 seconds the tester cannot communicate with the vehicle using OBDII communications Press 248 to return to the communication mode selection menu and select a different communication mode Return to ve
123. MATED ABS MOTOR PACK DIAGNOSIS 4 Seconds or keypress HAS MOTOR PACK BEEN SEPARATED FROM MODULATOR YES NO GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE COMPLETED TURN IGNITION OFF TURN IGNITION OFF Key is Key is turned OFF turned OFF REMOVE MOTOR PACK FROM MOD ASM REFER TO SERVICE MANUALA WITH MOTOR PACK SEPARATED FROM MODULATOR CONNECT MOTOR PACK WIRING TO MOTOR PACK Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 282 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application MAKE SURE MOTOR GEARS ARE CLEAR OF ALL OBJECTS TURN IGNITION BACK ON When key is turned back ON PRESS ENTER TO START MOTOR PACK DIAGNOSIS ENTER ARE ALL THREE MOTOR OR ESB MOTORS TURNING IS DEFECTIVE REPLACE MOTOR YES NO PACK YES ALL THREE MOTORS APPLY TO VERIFY RELEASE PRESS ENTER ENTER ARE ALL THREE MOTOR OR ESB MOTORS TURNING IS DEFECTIVE REPLACE MOTOR YES NO PACK YES ALL THREE MOTORS RELEASE SEE SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE A IF MODULATOR GEARS ROTATE REFER TO NO GEAR MOVEMENT 4 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 283 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SUBMODE F5 GEAR TENSION RELIEF TEST The Gear Tension Relief test relieves tension from the motor gears so the motor pack can be removed for off vehicle service CAUTION Prior to removing
124. ME DATA IN FRAME 1 1 Freeze Frame Data at initial detection of malfunction among misfire detected P0300 P0304 fuel system too lean P0171 and fuel system too rich P0172 2 Freeze Frame Data when a malfunction other than those in 1 above is detected Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 56 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application In F1 through F3 the Freeze Frame Data of each malfunction is displayed in the order as the malfunction is detected These data are not updated ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters between English and Metric G3 Print Freeze Frame Data if equipped with serial printer MODE F2 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS When you select the DTCs mode the tester reads all DTCs which have been saved by the vehicle s controllers and then displays Atwo column list of all DTCs How many codes have been reported by the ECM Trouble Codes P0443 P0110 P0111 A DTC description can be displayed for any DTC by moving the next to the desired DTC and pressing The is moved by pressing the or keys ACTIVE KEYS or Move up or down ENTER Display DTC description
125. MIL is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the MIL is being controlled If the tester detects the following condition the MIL Control mode will be terminated Vehicle speed detected 4 To control the MIL off press the key To turn it on press the key 5 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the MIL control to the ECM Operation of the MIL Control mode is summarized in the following flow diagram SELECT ACTUATOR STEP EGR FUEL PUMP CONT MIL CONTROL ENTER SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates MIL CONTROL CANIST VENT VAL XXX MIL TANK PRES VALVE XXX ON Indicates MIL More Data Pairs state Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 68 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM II Application ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Advance to MIL Control test Switch the MIL on while viewing parameters Switch the MIL off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu A C COND FAN The purpose of A C COND FAN mode is to diagnose the air conditioning fan and its circuit This mode allows you to control the A C FAN ON or OFF To operate the A C COND FAN mode do the following 1 Press am
126. MODE See the applicable Communication Mode chart Applicable Communication Mode Other Than North American Market on page 97 or North American Market 1991 1995 on page 98 for specific communication modes by vehicle ECU and model type SELECTING A VEHICLE TYPE If you selected F1 SUZUKI MODE you need to input the type of vehicle you are testing Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 95 A Selecting the Vehicle ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT VEHICLE Y F2 BALENO DIESEL SY419 F3 OTHER SELECT VEHICLE F0 VITARA X 90 SE416 SZ416 F1 ALTO SH410 Press the key to the left of the vehicle you are testing There may be a slight pause while the tester attempts to establish communications with the vehicle and requests the vehicle identification If you selected FO VITARA X 90 SE416 SZ416 from the Select Vehicle menu the tester will display a Select System screen Press if the car you are testing has Throttle Body Injection otherwise press Ge SELECT SYSTEM TBI Throttle Body Injection YES NO SELECTING A TRANSMISSION TYPE For some vehicles the Transmission Type must be selected Press the key to the left of the Transmission Type of the vehicle you are testing SELECT TRANS SELECT TRANS SELECT TRANS F0 MT F1 AT FO MT 4AT F0 MT AT ECM F1 3AT F1 AT PCM SELECTING THE TEST MODES If you selected F0 EURO MODE from the Communication Mode menu o
127. MP 56 MPH 56 0 Parameters Data Sample FRONT WHL SPEEDS that occurred 56 MPH 56 MPH More Data Samples just after REAR WHL SPEEDS the trigger 56 MPH 56 1 occurred More Data Samples after the trigger FIGURE 5 7 Data Display Phase 13 While in the data display phase pressing 1959 causes the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 55 REAR WHL SPEEDS 55 55 84 FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 55 REAR WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 8 74 Sample Time The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 8 74 means the sample was received 8 74 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 71 seconds means the sample was received 2 71 seconds before the trigger 14 The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer To print the data press a While the tester is sending data to the printer the keyboard is disabled SNAPSHOT data can also be printed in a tabular format using the SCREEN PRINT feature Refer to the Operator s Manual for more detail Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 273 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application 15 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press 9410 to return to the Snapshot Option menu If you are finished with th
128. Monitor enhancement data parameters for SUZUKI vehicles from the engine computer Mode F1 Print Data Send one data stream of information to a serial printer terminal or smart device Mode F3 Snapshot Capture and store ECM data parameters Data is captured before and after a trigger point Triggers can be on any trouble code a particular trouble code or manual tester key press Captured data can then be displayed as well as trouble codes Mode F4 Miscellaneous Tests Displays sub modes to operate single tests A chart of the tests available is provided on the following page Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 16 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application c d Ze y v Z 55 gt 6 E x X 072 o WU go z z cC 23 d uu c 4 o 9 4 O59 ga Z r X z zz c 000790 5 t2 amp o mc LE 2 a o x lt 5 E co lt n o 2 m m 1996 97 SY416 X X X X X 1998 SY416 X X X X X X X 1996 97 SW310 X X X X X 1998 SW310 X X X X X X X 1996 97 SWA413 X X X X X 1998 SWw413 X X X X X X 1996 97 SE416 X X X X X X X 1998 SE416 X X X X X X X X X X 1996 97 SZ416 X X X X X X 1998 57416 X X X X X X X X X X 1996 97 SV418 X X X X 1998 SV418 X X X X X X X NOTE While the tester is connected to the serial data l
129. NAPSHOT The SNAPSHOT mode is only available when ABS is selected from the System Select menu The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing data parameters before and or after the problem occurs When the tester 1s operating in SNAPSHOT mode it is constantly storing information about data parameters and trouble codes A time and position index for the stored information 1s also saved When the memory is full the oldest earliest data collected is erased to make room for new information A TRIGGER tells the tester the start center and end points of data collection You can specify a TRIGGER CONDITION so the tester collects data that will be most useful in diagnosing the current problem You can also select the location of the TRIGGER POINT TRIGGER POINT If F9 TRIG POINT is selected from the SNAPSHOT OPTIONS menu a trigger point selection menu is displayed The Trigger Point menu allows you to specify which data to capture data that occurs before after or both before and after the point at which the trigger occurs If no trigger point is selected the center trigger point will be used and a similar number of data samples before and after the trigger will be saved Trigger point is fully explained in Step 4 of the procedure TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition defines the specific circumstances under which you want the trigger to occur The possible trigger
130. NAPSHOT OPTIONS See Steps 1 3 F2 MANUAL TRIG Review previously F3 REPLAY DATA captured data YES ao More Data Parameters COOLANT TEMP CAPTURE 40 C 104 F PHASE aret FLASHING W See Steps 4 7 WAITING FOR TRIGGER USE AND GI9 TO SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F T FLASHING TRIGGER HAS OCCURRED TECH 1 MEMORY FULL OR DATA COOLANT TEMP DISPLAY 40 C 104 F PHASE INTAKE AIR TEMP 0 TRIGGER POSITION See Steps 8 12 40 C 104 F BEFORE TRIGGER OCCURRED AFTER TRIGGER OCCURRED Use Vand GI to view different Date OTHER DATA Use G to toggle between LIST SCREENS SAMPLE INDEX and SAMPLE TIME See Step 10 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 23 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application To operate the Snapshot mode do the following 1 Press GJ to select SNAPSHOT from the Select Mode menu 2 The trigger condition and review data options are displayed next in a Snapshot Options menu Press to select Manual Trigger or press to bypass the data capture phase and replay previously captured data 3 If F3 Replay Data is selected the data from the previous Snapshot is displayed See Step 8 for an explanation of Data Display 4 If Manual Trigger is selected the tester begins storing engine data parameters while displaying the Data List parameters SELECT
131. NCE is displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 19 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application FIXES TOP PARAMETER ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM DESIRED IDLE 850 RPM Figure A DESIRED IDLE 850 RPM ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER Figure SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST FUEL TANK LEVEL 80 PNP SIGNAL P N RANGE COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F VEHICLE SPEED 0 KPH VEHICLE SPEED 0 KPH INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S COOLANT TEMP 40 4 INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F FIGURE 5 1 Data List Mode Operation DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM CTP SWITCH ON COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 20 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F1 PRINT DATA PRINT DATA When the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed in the TECH 1 or if you are using a TECH 1 Se
132. NEL SUMITOMO DENKO 2 AIRBAG SIEMENS AG 3 01 ESTEEM 1600 SY416 4AT AISIN A W 1 ABS 4 CHANNEL SUMITOMO DENKO 21 AIRBAG SIEMENS AG 3 99 00 ESTEEM 1800 SY418 4AT AISIN A W 1 ABS 4 CHANNEL SUMITOMO DENKO 2 AIRBAG SIEMENS AG 3 01 ESTEEM 1800 SY418 4AT AISIN A W 1 ABS 4 CHANNEL SUMITOMO DENKO 21 AIRBAG SIEMENS AG 3 96 98 SIDEKICK 1800 SV418 ABS 3 CHANNEL SUMITOMO DENKO 2 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 176 1 Description BCM Application NORTH AMERICAN MARKET CONTINUED S MODRE PASIEN NAUTA C TURER NO 99 00 GRAND VITARA SQ625 ABS 3 CHANNEL SUMITOMO DENKO 2 01 15 01 XL 7 JA627 ABS 3 CHANNEL NISSHINBO 27 AIRBAG DENSO 28 HOW THE SUZUKI BCM APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE TECH 1A The tester lets you monitor data and control ECU operation by communicating with the ECU via the serial Data Link Connector DLC present in the vehicle The tester consists of a microcomputer which communicates with the ECU and controls its operation a keypad to receive directions from you and a display to provide the data you need to diagnose vehicle electronic problems The tester communicates with the ECU by applying an electrical signal to the serial data link connector Diagnostic Enable pin then reads the ECU data signal from one of the serial data link connector pins and translates it into an intelligible data display The Suzuki BCM Application is the software program which perfor
133. NGINE SPEED XXXX RPM XXXX Indicates RPM CONTROL value More Data Pairs Increase engine speed Decrease engine speed amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Return to initial desired idle RPM control Terminate the RPM Control mode and return to the Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 28 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application FIXED SPARK When check or adjustment of initial ignition timing is required the Fixed Spark mode allows you to reset the ignition to the initial timing CAUTION This test should only be run with the PARKING BRAKE ON and the wheels adequately secured Any other mode of operation is not recommended and is unsafe Use timing light when checking ignition timing To operate the Fixed Spark mode do the following 1 Press amp or to position the on the display menu next to FIXED SPARK then press GU Press if the DTCs have been cleared 2 Set the parking brake block the wheels then start the engine Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C 3 Press Guia to begin the test 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while operating in the Fixed Spark mode Select the data parameters
134. NT FUEL PUMP CNT PROGRAM ID ENTER ARE DTCs amp CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs PENDING DTCs CLEARED BEFORE THIS TEST YES NO IS PERFORMED SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER Indicates RDT FAN CONTROL ENTER CANIST VENT VAL XXX FEL Saja TANK PRES VALVE Gap XXX ON Indicates RDT FAN state More Data Pairs ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters G 5 G Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Advance to RDT Fan Control test Switch the RDT Fan Control on while viewing parameters Switch RDT Fan Control off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 46 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application FUEL PUMP CONTROL The purpose of FUEL PUMP CONT mode is to diagnose the fuel pump and its circuit This mode allows you to control fuel pump ON or OFF To operate the Fuel Pump Control mode do the following 1 Press or to position the on the display menu next to FUEL PUMP CNT then press GMAB 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu 3 Set the parking brake stop the engine then turn the ignition switch to ON 4 The Data List d
135. NTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F OFF 102 I min COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F 40 104 F 40 C 104 F EGR INTAKE AIR TEMP DESIRED IDLE OFF 40 C 104 F 797 RPM EGR COOLANT TEMP DESIRED IDLE OFF 40 C 104 F 797 RPM INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 104 F 40 104 ACTIVE KEYS FOR CREATING DATA PAIRS Scroll through displayed data parameters Return to the Select Mode menu lt FIX the upper or lower parameter MODE F1 PRINT DATA PRINT DATA When the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed in the TECH 1 or if you are using a TECH 1 Series A or MTS 3100 tester the Print Data mode allows you to print the VIN engine type and Data List to a serial printer or terminal This is the data list sent by the ECM or PCM to the tester The data list parameters can be printed without printing the VIN or engine type by pressing the af key in the Data List or Snapshot Replay mode Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 108 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application To select the Print Data mode do the following 1 Press to select the Print Data mode from the Select Mode menu The VIN entry screen is the first screen displayed in this mode Only the last 6 digits of the VIN are entered on this screen This information is then printed out as part of the he
136. OC Vviii D edge ado Pda aO S alb sare 299 IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM 300 BLANK METTI nem 300 ec 301 MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING 301 WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED 302 NO DATA RECEIVED NO RESPONSE COMMUNICATIONFAILED 302 NO COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE 1 icseskesog er kh ETE yx ERR EE EAS 303 KEYBOARD DISPLAY LOCKED OR PROGRAM RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE 304 COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING 304 Bo GLOSSARTOF IERMS adesicepk 5d id dense se ehbienades 306 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC ix ECM OBD II Application Operator s Manual 1 SUZUKI ECM OBD II APPLICATION DESCRIPTION The SUZUKI ECM OBD II Application is used to diagnose and troubleshoot the Engine and Emission Control systems used on 1996 and later Suzuki vehicles It takes full advantage of advanced diagnostic features introduced in these vehicles The SUZUKI ECM OBD II Application and the Vetronix tester team up to become a diagnostic tool which is both powerful and easy to use With the Vetronix tester you can select test modes which let you Read engine data parameters Diagnose intermittent problems by capturing and storing multiple samples of system data BEFORE AND AFTER THE PROBLEM OCCURS then examining the data to determine the problem This data is saved in the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the power
137. OME Ignition below 10 5V BE SURE ENGINE KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION Ignition above 10 5V 10 seconds SWITCHED IGN LESS THAN 10 5V AT ECBM REPAIR AS NECESSARY Ignition above 10 5V Wheels turning STOP VEHICLE TEST CANNOT BE RUN WHILE MOVING Wheels stopped Brake depressed REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE Brake released MOTOR REHOME COMMANDED ALL ABS MOTORS MAY NOT BE RE HOMED ABS DIAGNOSTIC Codes present REHOMING MOTORS 3 Seconds 3 Seconds TROUBLE CODE S PRESENT REPAIR AS NECESSARY SEE SERVICE MANUAL MOTOR REHOME COMPLETE 3 Seconds 3 Seconds FIGURE 5 16 Motor Rehome Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 298 6 FINISHING UP When you ve finished testing the following procedure should be followed 1 Check to see if any Trouble Codes are still set If you ve already cleared codes for a component but the codes are still set then the conditions which caused the codes to be set are probably still present Do not clear codes prior to diagnosing or repairing the ABS system if a fault is present Valuable Code History information that would help isolate the problem will be lost You should refer to the Suzuki Service Manual to isolate the problem 2 Disconnect the TECHI from the vehicle s DLC If the tester should become dirty you may clean it with a mild detergent or NOTE hand soap Avoid
138. OT CONNECTED CONNECTED WAITING TO 99 COMPLETE PRINT DATA PRINT DATA PRINT PRINT INPROGRESS INITIALIZATION SCREEN Print Sample _ SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION ENGINE TYPE TBI VIN 123456 TECH 1 DATA LIST NO DESCRIPTION VALUE 1 COOLANT TEMP 82 C 180 F 2 INTAKE AIR TEMP 21 C 70 F 3 DESIRED IDLE 875 RPM 4 IAC FLOW 102 l min 5 IAC ADJUST MONI 2 d ERR RE Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 109 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS TO PRINT DATA ENTER Move to the next section of the Print Data function 0 80 VIN entry keys Terminate the Print Data mode and return to the Select Mode menu MODE F2 DTC S DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DESCRIPTION Diagnostic Trouble Codes or DTC s are set by the ECM or PCM when an abnormal condition is detected They are a key to diagnosing many of the problems which can occur in the vehicle The DTC s mode allows you quick access to trouble codes for initial vehicle checks and to check that a repair procedure has been successful The displays for the DTC s mode are shown on the following pages The tester can clear all stored DTC s on vehicles except vehicles equipped with ECM Numbers 1 and 2 SE416 TBI and SE416 MFI as illustrated in the ECM Cartridge Coverage charts beginning on page 85 To clear DTC s on vehicles equipped with ECM Numbers 1 and 2 turn the ignition switch OFF then turn
139. P N R CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs which are different from the preassigned pairs Any two parameters can be displayed as a pair by simply scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed To fix the top parameter press af An asterisk will appear by the fixed parameter Press to fix the lower parameter The tester will not allow both the top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with VEHICLE SPEED and THROTTLE POS To do so scroll through the preassigned pairs with the and 9 and Gp key until you find a pair with VEHICLE SPEED Fix the VEHICLE SPEED by pressing the key if VEHICLE SPEED is the top parameter or the key if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or CO 9 and key until THROTTLE POS is displayed VEHICLE SPEED FIXES TOP 0 MPH PARAMETER THROTTLE POS 0 VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH THROTTLE POS 0 FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER PRINTING DATA When the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed in the Tech 1 or if you are using a Tech 1A or MTS 3100 tester the Print Data mode allows you to print the VIN system type and Data List to a serial printer or terminal This is the data list sent by the engine computer to the tester The data list parameters can be printed without printing the VIN or type by pr
140. PSHOT mode The DTC display can be frozen sing the key then unfrozen by pressing the key 1 Use the and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if not enough time was allowed for data capture before or after the trigger You can advance directly to the first last or trigger sample with the press of a button F4 Display first earliest sample F5 Display trigger sample 0 F6 Display last most recent sample 12 Pressing a allows you to determine what caused the SNAPSHOT trigger to occur For example if you selected the Automatic Trigger option pressing might result in the following display SNAPSHOT TRIGGER OCCURRED ON INTERMITTENT WHEEL SPEED Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 272 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application More Data Samples before the trigger Data Sample that occurred just before FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 55 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS the trigger 55MPH 55 1 More Data Samples occurred FRONT WHL SPEEDS VEHICLE SPEED rigger 55 MPH 56 MPH 5 MPH More Data osition 5 REAR WHL SPEEDS ABS WARNING LA
141. Radiator Fan x x x A C Condenser Fan Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 102 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT MODE SUB MENU FO Data List X F1 Print Data X F2 Trouble Code X Clear DTC X F3 Snapshot Any Code X Single Code X Manual Trig X Replay Data X F4 Misc Test SOV Test X EGR Valve 1 x EGR Valve 2 x Glow Plug Controller X Glow Lamp Indicator X MIL x Timing Control Valve X E Een SUB MENU 1 SUB MENU 2 n e MODE ala jst e 6 FO Data List x x x x x F1 Print Data x x x x x F2 Trouble Info F0 DTC x x x x x F1 Pending DTC x x x x x F2 Freeze Data X x x x x F3 Clear Info x x x x x F3 Snapshot F0 Any Code x x x x x F1 Single Code x x x x x F2 Manual Trig x x x x x F3 Replay Data x x x x x F4 Misc Test F0 Output Test RPM Control X x x x x Fixed Spark x x x x x IAC Cal Step EGR x x x x x Evap Cani Purg Duty x x x x x Fuel Pump Cont x x x x x MIL Control x x x x x Radiator Fan X x x A C Condenser Fan x x x F1 Readiness Test x x F5 ECU ID X Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 103 5 Selecting and Operating
142. S 10 seconds TEST OK RELEASE PARKING BRAKE OR CORRECT CAUSE OF RED BRAKE WARNING LP When problem is fixed SELECT CHANNEL F0 LEFT FRONT F4 RIGHT FRONT F8 REAR AXLE When pedal isn t depressed for 45 seconds TEST HAS BEEN INACTIVE FOR 45 SECONDS TEST TERMINATED TRANS IN NEUTRAL EXIT FIRMLY DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL LEFT FRONT A START RIGHT FRONT A START REAR AXLE START REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE BRAKE XXX When pedal is released FIGURE 5 9 Hydraulic Control Test ACTIVE KEYS Select Hydraulic Control test Confirm that all wheels are off the ground ua ao Respond to tester questions EXIT Return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 278 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SUBMODE F3 IDLE UP TEST The Idle Up test controls the idle up circuit and displays the Idle Up status on 4WD 3 WSS equipped vehicles To run the Idle Up Test do the following 1 Press GJ to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GJ to select Idle Up from the Select ABS Test menu 3 Press Gi to select Manual Control from the Select Test menu 4 The tester display confirms that you have manual control of the idle up circuit then advances to a display of instructions for controlling the idle up circuit 5 The instruction display shows that the key is used to turn t
143. S ECU No 13 made by BOSCH The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing data parameters before and or after the problem occurs NOTE For ABS with ECU No 2 made by Sumitomo Denko the tester stops EH saving data when a current trouble code occurs When the tester 1s operating in SNAPSHOT mode it is constantly storing information about data parameters and trouble codes A time and position index for the stored information is also saved The tester stores all of the Data List parameters and trouble codes for the selected system When the memory is full the oldest earliest data collected is erased to make room for new information A TRIGGER tells the tester when to stop collecting data For the SUZUKI BCM Application a trigger occurs when any trouble code is detected by the ECU TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition defines the specific circumstances under which you want the trigger to be set The possible trigger conditions are F0 ANY CODE If any trouble code is detected by the ECU it will cause the trigger to be set F1 SINGLE CODE For A T systems you can select a specific trouble code that must be detected before the trigger will be set Step 3 on page 204 tells you how to enter the code NOTE F1 Single Code is not available when testing ABS ECU No 2 made by EH Sumitomo Denko F2 MANUAL TRIGGER While operating the
144. SE WIDTH B1 INJECTOR PULSE WIDTH B2 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 154 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK mSEC The Pulse Width is the length of time in milliseconds the ECM or PCM is commanding the fuel injectors on Injector on time is how EFI systems control fuel mixture A longer on time yields a richer mixture INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE DEGREES C DEGFRES F Intake Air Temperature is needed to determine the amount of air passing into the intake manifold as air density varies with temperature LONG FT B1 B1 BANK 1 LH BANK LONG FT B2 B2 BANK 2 RH BANK UNITS This parameter provides learned value adaptive memory correction to the air fuel ratio feedback control system for Bank 1 or Bank 2 It is the percentage of rich or lean correction that has been applied to the basic injection duration calculation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE MAP inHg KPa mmHg The Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor voltage is read by the ECM or PCM and is used among other things to compute engine load MASS AIR FLOW MAF g sec Ib min Certain engines have a Mass Air Flow MAF sensor which measures air flow into the intake manifold This data is used by the ECM or PCM in determining engine load MIXTURE CONTROL DWELL MIXTURE CONTROL DWELL B1 amp B2 B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK NONE Mixture Control Dwell value repres
145. SHI SZ416 4AT 1997 98 X 90 1 6L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI SZ416 4AT PCM 1996 SIDEKICK 1800 1 8L SFI MT ECM HITACHI SV418 4AT 1997 98 SIDEKICK 1800 1 8L SFI MT ECM HITACHI SV418 4AT PCM 1999 VITARA 1 6L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI SQ416 4AT PCM 1999 VITARA 2 0L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI SQ420 4AT PCM 1999 GRAND VITARA 2 5L SFI MT ECM HITACHI SQ625 4AT PCM Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 2 Suzuki ECM OBD II Application Description ECM OBD II Application FUEL YEAR ENGINE SYS ECU ECU MFG SIZE TYPE TYPE 1999 ESTEEM 1 8L SFI MT ECM HITACHI SY418 4AT 2001 XL 7 2 7L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI JA627 4AT PCM DIAGNOSTIC MODES AVAILABLE CARB MODE The CARB California Air Resources Board Mode of operation provides standardized testing of emission related components A further description of the CARB Mode and instructions for operating the CARB Mode test procedures are included in Chapter 6 SUZUKI MODE The Suzuki Mode provides tests specifically designed for Suzuki vehicles The operation is included in Chapter 5 DIAGNOSIS OF THE SQ SERIES SY418 AND JA627 Operation of tests designed for the SQ series SY418 and JA627 are described in Chapter 7 ACTIVE KEYS amp Answer questions asked on tester display and select data parameters to monitor Move to next screen Activate m
146. SHOT Records data before and after the occurrence of an intermittent fault condition MODE F4 MISC TESTS The Miscellaneous Tests mode allows the user to perform specialized tests on the ABS system MODE F5 MOTOR REHOME Returns all ABS actuator pistons to the home position MISCELLANEOUS TESTS AVAILABLE The following Miscellaneous Test modes are available for testing the ABS Press from the Select Mode menu to display the Misc Tests menu F0 MANUAL CONTROL F0 SOLENOID TEST ABS DBC7 ONLY F1 PUMP MOTOR ABS DBC7 ONLY F2 HYDRAULIC CONTROL F2 RELAY TEST ABS DBC7 ONLY F3 AUTO BLEED ABS DBC7 ONLY F4 LAMP TEST ABS DBC7 ONLY F4 MOTOR TEST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 253 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application F5 GEAR TENSION RELIEF F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD F8 LAMP TEST F9 SYSTEM ID When F4 MISC TESTS is selected for SE and SZ series vehicles with 4WD 3WSS the tester displays the following menu NOTE SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F3 IDLE UP Press a to perform the Miscellaneous Tests listed above If is pressed the tester will display a menu with one option FO MANUAL CNTRL Press to perform the Manual Control Test on the Idle Up circuit MISCELLANEOUS TESTS DESCRIPTIONS Delco ABS VI Miscellaneous Test Descriptions F0 MANUAL CONTROL Allows you to manually control ABS actuators including the Solenoids and
147. SHOT TRIGGER Point Center Type Manual The sample number of a Snapshot is displayed in the lower right of the display This index number will initially be a 0 samples after the trigger will be displayed as positive numbers and samples before the trigger will be displayed as negative numbers While replaying a Snapshot pressing will cause the tester to toggle between the sample index and the sample time Engine Speed 1024 RPM Ignition Advance 29 5 2 The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 6 seconds means the sample was received 2 6 seconds before the trigger Engine Speed 1024 RPM Ignition Advance 29 5 7 1 ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters or for Select User Data Select or Deselect Parameters Scroll through parameters in Select User Data Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs p displayed p 8y Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs played p Display first earliest sample G Display trigger sample 0 F6 Display last most recent sample F7 Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters between English and Metric 88 pp Print data li
148. SNAPSHOT mode you can always cause the trigger to be set by pressing 11359 VIEWING CAPTURED DATA By selecting F3 REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT menu you have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data All data captured during SNAPSHOT will be retained in the tester until it is overwritten by a new SNAPSHOT or if the tester is disconnected from the serial data link connector or the cigarette lighter for at least 24 hours Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 203 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application PRINTING CAPTURED DATA In addition you can print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample A VP 411 or compatible printer is required to support this print function See Step 11 The operation of SNAPSHOT mode is divided into three phases Set Up beginning at Step 1 Data Capture beginning at Step 4 and Data Display beginning at Step 8 SNAPSHOT SETUP PHASE To enter the Setup phase of Snapshot mode do the following 1 Press GJ to select the SNAPSHOT mode from the Select Mode menu 2 The trigger condition and review data options are displayed next in a self scrolling Snapshot Options menu To select a trigger option just press the Function Key displayed to the left of the desired trigger condition To replay previously captured data press FOR ECU NO 2 ABS MADE BY SUMITOMO DENKO When you are testing the ABS if
149. STIC ALL DIAGNOSTIC EXIT INFORMATION INFORMATION CLEARED NOT CLEARED The Freeze Frame display works like a Data List You can cycle through parameter pairs using and You can also use and GP to create your own data pairs See Mode F0 Data List on page 106 for more details NOTE DTC s can also be displayed in SNAPSHOT mode DTC s can also be printed in a tabular format using the Screen Print feature Screen Print is enabled by pressing G until an RS232 SET UP menu is displayed Press Gp to enable the Screen Print function Refer to the RS232C I F TECH 1A or MTS 3100 Operator s Manual for more detail ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Clear all stored ECM or PCM DTC s YES Clear all stored ECM or PCM DTC s Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 114 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS o Return to display DTC s DTC s are not cleared Display next DTC G GJ Selection keys Hold Select RS232C SET UP menu Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters between English and Metric G3 Print Freeze Frame Data if equipped with serial printer Terminate the DTC s display and return to the select mode menu MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by STORING ENGINE DATA PARAMETERS BEFORE AND OR AFTER THE PROBLEM OCCURS
150. SUBISHI 24 44 For MT vehicle See NOTE PCM MITSUBISHI 24 44 For AT vehicle See NOTE SQ625 SFI ECM HITACHI 16 For MT vehicle PCM HITACHI 16 For AT vehicle ECM HITACHI 25 43 For MT vehicle See NOTE PCM HITACHI 25 43 _ ForATvehicde See NOTE SQ420WD DIESEL ECM BOSCH 39 RHZ engine SF series TBI Bypass Air ECM DENSO 4 Type TBI Throttle ECM DENSO 5 Position Type SFI TBI ECM DENSO 31 For MT vehicle with HO2S 2 rear PCM DENSO 31 For AT vehicle with 28 2 rear MF413 SF413 SFI ECM DENSO 26 For MT vehicle PCM DENSO 26 For AT vehicle Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 85 1 Suzuki ECM Application Description ECM OBD 1 Application MODEL ENGINE ECU MFT ECU REMARKS CONT TYPE SY413 415 416 MFI ECM DENSO 5 PCM DENSO 5 3AT See NOTE SFI ECM DENSO 13 18 See NOTE PCM DENSO 13 18 3AT only See NOTE ECM DENSO 29 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear PCM DENSO 29 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear 3AT SY418 SFI ECM HITACHI 8 14 Vehicle with step EGR 36 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear SY419 DIESEL SOV LUCAS 20 ECM BOSCH 40 Electronic controlled type MB308 SB308 SFI ECM DENSO 27 SH410 TBI ECM MITSUBISHI 6 MFI ECM MITSUBISHI 9 For MT vehicle PCM MITSUBISHI 9 For AT vehicle SFI ECM DENSO 30 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear MT PCM DENSO 30 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear AT MH410
151. Suzuki Aftermarket Application ECM OBD ID ECM OBD I BCM ABS Airbag Operator s Manual 7 Vetronix Bosch Group Vetronix Corporation Copyright 2002 Manual P N 08002589 Ver B Tech 19 Tech 1A8 Mastertech is a registered trademark of Vetronix Corp Printed in USA 11 02 This entire document and all information contained herein are proprietary confidential and exclusive trade secret property of Vetronix Corporation and shall not be reproduced duplicated or copied in whole or in part or made available to any person firm or corporation without the prior written permission of Vetronix Corporation Some Things You Should Know CAUTION When performing any checks with the engine running in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation Never inhale exhaust Gos gases they contain carbon monoxide a colorless odorless extremely dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or death CAUTION Always set the parking brake securely and block the drive wheels before e performing any checks or repairs on the vehicle Disclaimer The Tech 1 Tech 1A and MTS 3100 testers are designed for use by trained service personnel only The testers have been developed for the sole purpose of diagnosing and repairing automotive electronic systems Every attempt has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information based on factory service information available at the time of
152. T TEST F5 GEAR TEN REL F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD TEST FOR ADEQUATE BATTERY CAPACITY FOR ABS OPERATION 4 Seconds or e keypress ABS VOLTAGE TEST IMPORTANT DO NOT ABUSE THIS TEST DAMAGE TO ABS COMPONENTS MAY RESULT IF TEST IS OVERUSED ABS VOLTAGE TEST FAILED ONLY RUN TEST WHEN DIRECTED TO BY SERVICE MANUAL ABS VOLTAGE TEST START ENGINE KEEP IN PARK NEUTRAL A DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL FIRMLY BRAKE OFF Brake depressed If cooling is required ABS VOLTAGE TEST START TEST ABS IGN 13 4V ABS BATT 12 9V SYSTEM MUST COOL DUE TO HIGH CURRENT USED WAIT XX SECONDS If required amount of time has passed ABS VOLTAGE TEST f brake BRAKE RELEASED IN PROGRESS is released ABSIGN 13 4 TEST TERMINATED ABS BATT 12 9V A 6 10 Seconds ABS VOLTAGE TEST PASSED Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 288 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application ACTIVE KEYS Select Voltage Load test Advance the tester display after performing a requested action EXIT Return to the Select Test menu F8 LAMP TEST The Lamp test allows you to manually control Lamps for diagnostic purposes The tester displays the list of Lamps for the vehicle you are testing To run the Lamp Test do the following 1 Press G3 t
153. TEN PSG RES REV Fix Code Identification Immobilizer Inches Mercury Initiator Kilopascals Left Front Left Rear Malfunction Monitor Overdrive Pretensioner Pressure Control Solenoid Performance Position Pressure Pressure Pretensioner Passenger Resistance Revolution Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 235 B Glossary RF RLY RPM RR RS232C SDL SDM SENS SNSR SKC SIG SOL SPD STR SW SYS TCC TCM TEMP TET THROT TOS TP TRANS TRANS TURB VIN VOLT VSS WSS Right Front Relay Revolutions Per Minute Right Rear Standard Serial Communication interface Serial Data Link Sensing and Diagnostic Module Sensor Sensor Secret Key Code Signal Solenoid Speed Starter Switch System Torque Converter Clutch Transmission Control Module Temperature Transmission Fluid Temperature Throttle Torque Sensor Throttle Position Transmission Transmission Transponder Immobilizer Turbine Vehicle Identification Number Voltage Vehicle Speed Sensor Wheel Speed Sensor Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 236 ABS Airbag Application Operator s Manual 1 SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG APPLICATION DESCRIPTION The Suzuki ABS Airbag Application is included in the Suzuki Application Cartridge and is used with the Vetronix tester to diagnose and troubleshoot the Antilock Brake System ABS and Airbag system used on the followin
154. TER CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER STEP EGR CONTROL A INCREASE Y DECREASE ENTER Indicates STEP EGR CONTROL mode CANIST AIR VAL XXX EG TANK PRES VALVE XXX XXX EXIT Indicates STEP EGR CONTROL value ACTIVE KEYS More Data Pairs amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Advance to STEPPING EGR Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Increase STEPPING EGR control value while viewing parameters Decrease STEPPING EGR control value while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 38 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application CANISTER AIR VALVE The purpose of CANI AIR VAL mode is to diagnose the EVAP canister air valve This mode allows you to control EVAP canister air valve ON or OFF To operate the CANI AIR VAL mode do the following 1 Press amp or to position the on the display menu next to CANI AIR VAL then press GMAB 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Miscellaneous Te
155. TEST A START CONTINUE COMPLETE FAIL WITHOUT FAIL WITH COMPLETE WITHOUT ERROR ERROR WITH ERROR ERROR Y Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 131 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE 1 KEYS FOR SOV TEST MODE Initiate the SOV test Scroll to next screen Return to Miscellaneous Test menu CANI PURG VAL DUTY TYPE The canister purge valve output control mode allows you to regulate the valve opening in increments from 0 to 100 and displays the canister purge valve monitor value as a percentage To select Cani Purg Val Duty Type in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the CANI PURG VAL Test from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition to the on position 3 Press to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that the means increase and means decrease 5 The test begins with the Cani purge valve at the current value PRG is displayed at the end of line 2 and the cani purge valve value is displayed at the end of line 4 Press the key to increase the cani purge valve value and the key to decrease the value If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions table the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press CAR to return to the Output Tests menu 7
156. Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application To select Stepping EGR Control mode in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the STEPPING EGR Control mode from the Output Tests menu or Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake block the wheels put the transmission in Park or Neutral then start the engine 3 Press to begin the test 4 EGR is displayed at the end of line 2 and the Stepping EGR value is displayed at the end of line 4 Press the key to increase the Stepping EGR value To decrease the Stepping EGR value press the key The Stepping EGR value is displayed as a percentage If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 5 Press Qp to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu SELECT MISC TEST F4 STEP EGR CONTROL TEST OF STEP EGR CONTROL SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS START ENGINE THEN PRESS ENTER STEP EGR CONTROL A INCREASE y DECREASE COOLANT TEMP DATA LIST PARAMETER STEPPING EGR MONITOR XXX EGR INTAKE AIR TEMP XXX STEPPING EGR MONITOR VALUE Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 130 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS FOR STEPPING EGR CONTROL MODE amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Advance to STEPPING EGR Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Increase STEPPING
157. To Select Mode To ABS To Airbag Menu Manufacturer Manufacturer Selection Selection FIGURE 4 1 Select System Menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 187 4 Selecting the Vehicle BCM Application SELECT SYSTEM Ay F0 TRANSMISSION F1 ABS F2 AIRBAG ECU MANUF F0 SUMITOMO F1 NISSINBO SELECT MODE AV F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE SELECT MODE AV F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST FIGURE 4 2 F1 ABS Manufacturer Selection Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 188 4 Selecting the Vehicle BCM Application SELECT SYSTEM Ay F0 TRANSMISSION F1 ABS F2 AIRBAG ECU MANUF F0 SIEMENS F1 DENSO ALWAYS DO AIRBAG DIAG SYS CHECK IN S M AIRBAG SYS SECTION v SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODES FIGURE 4 3 F2 Airbag Manufacturer Selection Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 189 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING THE TEST MODES This chapter contains a brief description of each test mode available in the Suzuki BCM Application A more detailed description is included later in this chapter along with the operating procedure for each test mode Mode FO Data List Monitor data parameters from the ECU Mode F1 Print Data Send one data stream of information to a serial printer terminal or smart device Mode F2 Trouble Codes Display stored trouble codes on all models and clear stored trouble codes on certain models NOTE When che
158. a tester or compatible printer transferred to a computer for further analysis or displayed on a terminal The SNAPSHOT data will be retained within the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle However IF YOU POWER UP THE TESTER WITHOUT A MASTER CARTRIDGE OR WITH A DIFFERENT MASTER CARTRIDGE THE SNAPSHOT DATA WILL BE LOST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 247 4 SELECTING THE SYSTEM Press 19 9 from the ABS AIRBAG identification screen to continue to the Select System displays If stored data is available when the tester is powered up lt ENTER gt PREVIOUS is displayed at the top of the screen Pressing 1959 automatically selects the last system that was selected Since only the ABS system has Snapshot capabilities only ABS data will be available for review Press a to test the ABS or press GP to test the Airbag system SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG X X FOR DELCO DELPHI ENTER ENTER ENTER PREVIOUS F0 ABS F2 AIRBAG SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F2 AIRBAG ENTER SELECT ABS TYPE Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 248 4 Selecting The System ABS Airbag Application SELECTING THE ABS TYPE If you are testing the ABS system the tester asks which type of ABS system is installed on the vehicle Press the key to the left of the ABS type you are testing SELECT ABS TYPE F0 2WD 4WSS F1 2WD 3WSS F2 4WD 3WSS F3 4WD 4WSS SELECT
159. able for ABS and Airbag systems Each test mode is described on the following pages ABS AIRBAG F0 DATA LIST F0 DATA LIST F1 HISTORY F1 PRINT DATA SQ SERIES ONLY F2 DTC s F2 DTC CODES OR TROUBLE CODES F2 DTC INFO ABS DBC7 ONLY F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 MOTOR REHOME NOT AVAILABLE FOR DBC7 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 252 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application Important For SW SE and SZ series vehicles NOTE When F4 Misc Tests is selected from the Select Mode menu the following message is displayed and should be ignored FOR ALL ABS TESTS THE TESETER MUST BE POWERED DIRECTLY FROM THE BATTERY USING A BATTERY ADAPTER CABLE Power is provided to the tester through the DLC even when the ignition switch is off therefore the battery adapter cable is not required TEST MODES DESCRIPTIONS MODE F0 DATA LIST Displays diagnostic data parameters MODE F1 DTC HISTORY Displays additional information about the state of the vehicle at the time the DTC occurred MODE F1 PRINT DATA Sends a copy of the DATA LIST to a printer or terminal via an RS 232 cable MODE F2 DTC s DTC CODES TROUBLE CODES Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes which have been stored Trouble codes can also be cleared using Mode F2 NOTE ABS DBCT systems will display Current or History DTCs to the right of EH the code number MODE F3 SNAP
160. ach parameter as well as all trouble codes are saved for each sample The data display indicates the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the GUD keys can always be used to force a trigger The number of samples saved by the tester is a function of the system being tested Normally the trigger point occurs in the center of the data and half of the samples are before the trigger and half are after If you selected a different trigger point during setup using the function the trigger point sample 0 will be near the beginning or end of the samples 7 Once the trigger occurs the tester continues to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W wait with a fixed T trigger As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically After the data capture terminates the tester briefly displays the cause of the trigger This display can also be seen by pressing GJ in the Data Display Phase Step 12 8 Pressing 24 after the trigger has occurred terminates the Data Capture phase early and the SNAPSHOT mode will move to the Data Display phase Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 270 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 56 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS
161. ader information that accompanies each data list print out The VIN is entered via the numeric portion of the key pad and the key is pressed to move to the next section of the print function N The next screen requires the key to be pressed to start printing the data This screen allows the cable to be connected between the tester and the receiving device When the key is pressed the WAITING TO PRINT DATA screen is displayed until printing begins If this screen is displayed for more than a few seconds something is wrong with the set up Check that all connections are secure and that any receiving device is turned on and in the proper receive mode A As printing begins the tester displays the COMPLETE of the print procedure After the printing is 100 complete the VIN screen is immediately displayed with the previously selected VIN Pressing the key twice from this screen will cause another data stream to be buffered for printing as soon as the current data stream 1s output from the tester 5 Pressing the 238 key at any point will cause the select mode menu to be displayed If the key is pressed before printing is completed only the data that has already been sent to the printer will be printed SOME DATA WILL BE LOST PRINT DATA ENTER LAST 6 VIN PRESS ENTER TO RS232C NOT DIGITS 000000 PRINT DATA THEN PRESS ENTER PRINT DATA VIN SET UP RS232C RS232C INTERFACE ENTRY SCREEN CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE N
162. an be printed on a VP 411 or compatible printer transferred to a computer for further analysis or displayed on a terminal The SNAPSHOT data will be retained within the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle However IF YOU POWER UP THE TESTER WITHOUT AN APPLICATION CARTRIDGE OR WITH A DIFFERENT APPLICATION CARTRIDGE THE SNAPSHOT DATA WILL BE LOST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 9 4 SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR COMMUNICATIONS MODE amp TEST MODE SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once you ve pressed AAU to confirm the Suzuki ECM OBD ID display as explained in Chapter 2 the next step is to select the model year of the vehicle being tested SELECT MODEL YEAR XXXX Enter the model year of the vehicle being tested Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 10 4 Selecting The Model Year Communications Mode amp Test Mode ECM OBD II Application SELECTING A MODEL After the model year is selected a SELECT MODEL menu appears 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2004 SELECT MODEL v 4 SELECT MODEL v F0 52416 F0 SW310 SELECT MODEL Y F1 SE416 F1 SW413 F0 SW310 F2 SY416 F1 SW413 F2 SW310 F2 SY416 SELECT MODEL Y SELECT MODEL Y F3 SQ625 SELECT MODEL Y F3 SW413 F4 Q416 420 F3 SQ625 F4 SY416 F5 SV418 F5 SY418 F4 SQ416 420 F5 SY418 SELECT MODEL Y F6 JA627 Press the function key corresponding to the model of the vehicle bein
163. anthi cue 56 Freeze Frome Daa LMS wath Rta e ice dpa iode sibs he 56 MODE F2 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 57 MODE CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION 58 MODE F4 OXYGEN SENSOR MONITORING TEST RESULTS 59 UL Sensor TOS MCR tem des he thori cac qua AEA Ene Pes ECR bed bed de 59 LL DM DINE Sin bane cee Mert dde oat dae deam ded bob RE E be bee be 59 MODE FS READINESS TESTS 60 MODE F6 ON BOARD TESTS PENDING DTCS 61 7 OPERATING THE TEST MODES FOR THE SQ SERIES SY418 AND Se abe geeu ade oc4 beh CR SeE ee bSeEGR Tg 62 ECM COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS FOR THE SQ SERIES SY418 AND WAGE x xc doe Sabo Sd PR Go ER RS who ees 63 Suzuki Aftermarket Application TOC ii NODEPPDNXTALIAT Zeb EM CEPR EO er EddpH IRIS bed HI Rd d e deter 63 MODE TI PRINT DATA SuEbTRRRETOIRRYYPAE TO RRETCPERIUORQETUPRER Phew 4 63 MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES MODE an enna x RR 64 MODE SNAPSHOT s5c5540 685060444984 6a EATER MER RES 66 NODE TT MISC TESIS Roe RR 66 FO Output Tests sexe RENTE AREAS AGE UR EAR d AEGRO AUS Eee EE GER OCA RCRORGRA 67 E de anes da abr Gua Qe Wd 68 BACAR PON hd BE AAD END EREA DA RHE ARRABB ARE UREA 69 MODE PCU IE quide eO ERST
164. arket Application Page 139 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ECU NO XXXXX XXXX SOFTWARE VERSION XXX To return to the Select Mode menu press 2419 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 140 6 FINISHING UP After using the Suzuki ECM Application a few simple steps will insure that you get the most life out of your diagnostic tool 1 Remove power to the tester by disconnecting the serial data link cable from the serial data link connector You may want to inspect the cable and connector for any damage or corrosion 2 Unplug the cartridge and store it and the cable in the travelling case If the tester should become dirty you may wipe it off with a clean cloth and mild detergent or hand soap Avoid using harsh solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents Benzene Trichloroethylene etc Although the tester is water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester prior to storage Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 141 7 DTCS Listed below is a brief description for all DTC S that can be displayed with the Suzuki ECM Application NOTE For Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Codes of the Pxxxx format see the related vehicle service manual provided by Suzuki POM TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTOR 1 ENGINE POSITION Engine position sensor circuit open SENSOR CKT MALF 3 COOLANT TEMP Coolant te
165. ata only after it has been interrogated by the master device A typical operating scenario is for the master device to periodically send a polling message to one or more of the slave devices The slaves can then send a response message containing for example the states of the slave s inputs or internal parameters back to the master Once the tester has control of the serial data link it can perform diagnostics on any of the devices connected to serial data link which support serial data diagnostics It is important to note that the tester can only perform diagnostics which were provided for in the design of the various components Some components might implement minimum diagnostics such as trouble code and diagnostic parameter readout Other components might implement high end diagnostics including provision for extensive control over the operation of the component and override of internal parameters This can be used to exercise specific circuits in order to assist in the isolation of faults Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 80 B GLOSSARY This section describes the abbreviations and terminology which are used in this manual ABS A C A T B1 B2 BTDC CAL CANI CARB CHK CMP CNT COND CONT CONTR CTP DEG DIAG DLC DTC Absolute Air Conditioning Automatic Transmission Bank 1 LH Bank Bank 2 RH Bank Before Top Dead Center Calibration Canister California Air Resources Board Check
166. ating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Advance to Fuel Pump Control test Switch the Fuel Pump on while viewing parameters Switch the Fuel Pump off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 48 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application PROGRAM ID The Program ID mode allows you to display the Program Identification number To operate the Program ID mode do the following 1 Press or to position the on the display menu next to PROGRAM ID then press 192 2 The Program ID is displayed 3 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu MISC TEST Ay RDT FAN CNT FUEL PUMP CNT PROGRAM ID ENTER PROGRAM ID 1 ID1 PROGRAM ID 2 ID2 PROGRAM ID 3 ID3 PROGRAM ID 4 IDA EXIT Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 49 6 OPERATING THE TEST MODES CARB MODE The following section contains a brief description of test modes available in the SUZUKI ECM OBD II application Note that the test modes are different for FO CARB MODE and F1 SUZUKI MODE Also note that descriptions of the test modes for the SQ series and SY418 are provided in Chapter 7 F0 CARD MODE Mode F0 Current Data Monitors data parameters from the engine computer Allows you to select which data parameters are displayed Mode F1 Freeze Data Displays cer
167. be 272 MODE F4 MISC TESTS DELCO ABS VD 274 submogde PO Mannal Conti pa qe eR ee 274 Submode F2 Hydraulic Control ca cae eoa ra aia aol doa 277 Aubmode F3 Idle Up TES csse HS ut dust SHEEP EASES EHS 2 OSE EERE 279 AS MUN RA gt be rb dr esie Sq oe anton aes 280 Submode F3 Gear Tension Relief Test was eas da TERRAE ERA 284 Suomode FO Reay FONE acs yin ds ath edi dos ib dd rad Ca Gums Qd dedos 285 Submode F7 Ioltage Load Test 287 PELEAS dd dd dca deut die dedi S dad dcr ddp ode ame ew ned 289 aubmode F9 System JD iQ su EH4 RHA RR en tdt idn ERr IRTEEREN ERAT EAA 290 MODE F4 MISC TESTS DELPHI ABS 7 292 bubmode PO SONNO TENE ebd ewgnsedore 292 Submode gt Fumo Molor JU nts ade d edad ied 293 SHORE TOT MOOV TEN gave did Nee Oe MDE pua AGRE OE qa Ca tam ee 293 Submide 235 diuo Bleed oad deo aoa Red Added edad edd pd dr don pd 294 PELE TEST 26 cakeadeeddaibeedhacs neh ned he TACs pedo dod PALA 296 MODE F5 MOTOR REHOME DELCO ABS 296 Suzuki Aftermarket Application T
168. before and after the problem occurs then examining the data to determine the problem This data is saved in the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the power is removed from the tester control some actuators e fix spark advance fix Idle Air Control Calibration IAC CAL print data and vehicle information This information can be analyzed and displayed to assist service technicians in diagnosing engine and driveability problems The Suzuki ECM Application is included in the Suzuki Application Cartridge When used with the tester it is capable of monitoring and diagnosing the engine with ECM or engine AT with PCM on the models listed in the chart on the following page Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 84 1 Suzuki ECM Application Description ECM OBD 1 Application SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION COVERAGE OTHER THAN NORTH AMERICAN MARKET ENGINE ECU MFT aig REMARKS TYPE NO SEA16 TBI 2 Valve ECM MITSUBISHI Cylinder MFI 4 Valve ECM DENSO 2 Cylinder SFI 4 Valve ECM MITSUBISHI 3 Cylinder PCM MITSUBISHI 11 only See NOTE on page 87 ECM MITSUBISHI 37 Vehicle with HO2S 2 rear 57416 SFI 4 Valve ECM MITSUBISHI 3 Cylinder SV420G SFI ECM HITACHI 7 For MT vehicle PCM HITACHI 10 For AT vehicle SV620 SFI ECM HITACHI 7 PCM HITACHI 10 4AT only See NOTE Q416 420 SFI ECM MITSUBISHI 15 For MT vehicle PCM MITSUBISHI 15 For AT vehicle ECM MIT
169. ch 1A GM 12 14 Pin P N 02001364 Figure 2 5 Tech 1 None Figure 2 6 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 241 2 Getting Started ABS Airbag Application LA Application Cartridge MTS 3100 Tester lt a Ld m d Ti Zo 16 14 Pin Type 3 Adapter Cable FIGURE 2 1 MTS 3100 ABS Delphi Brake Control 7 with 16 Pin Connector OBD Il Tech 1A Tester 16 14 Pin Type 3 Adapter Cable Cartridge FIGURE 2 2 Tech 1A ABS Delphi Brake Control 7 with 16 Pin Connector OBD II Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 242 2 Getting Started ABS Airbag Application 14 12 Pin VIM Adapter OBD II VIM Application Cartridge 16 24 Pin VIM Adapter Cable FIGURE 2 3 Tech 1ABS Delphi Brake Control 7 with 16 Pin Connector OBD II MASTERTECH 4 Application Cartridge DLC Cable DC GM 12 14 Pin DLC FIGURE 2 4 MTS 3100 ABS Airbag with 12 Pin Connector Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 243 2 Getting Started ABS Airbag Application TECH 1A Application Cartridge GM 12 14 Pin Adapter DC Power Cable FIGURE 2 5 Tech 1A ABS Airbag with 12 Pin Connector DC Power Cable Application Cartridge FIGURE 2 6 Tech 1 ABS Airbag with 12 Pin Connector Before operating the Suzuki ABS Airbag Application do the following 1 Insert the Suzuki ABS Airbag Application Cartridge into the bottom slot of the Tech 1A or Tech 1 or into the back slot of the MTS
170. cking and clearing trouble codes be sure to follow the instructions in the Service Manual or the correct reading or clearing of the DTC s may not occur Mode F3 Snapshot Capture and store ECU data parameters Data is captured before and after a trigger point Triggers can be on any trouble code a particular trouble code or manual tester key press Captured data can then be displayed as well as trouble codes NOTE EB The Snapshot mode is not available when testing the Airbag system Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 190 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application Mode F4 Miscellaneous Tests The Miscellaneous Tests mode is used to select a submenu of tests Pressing GJ displays the miscellaneous tests available To return to the Select Mode menu just press 2419 ECU SYSTEM DATA PRINT TROUBLE SNAP MISC NO LIST DATA fete D SHOT TEST 2 ABS 3 AIRBAG i 15 ABS A 21 ABS 27 ABS 28 AIRBAG SELECTING TEST MODES The tester makes selecting the test mode easy by displaying a list of tests a test mode menu The menu also displays which key is used to select each test mode An example test mode menu is shown in Figure 5 l SELECT MODE vA F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE SELECT VEHICLE to Data List to Pr
171. criptions BCM Application DESCRIPTOR FORMAT Following is a description of all parameters that can be displayed with the Suzuki BCM Application Included is a listing of all the parameters available for each category e a description of the parameter the units and the range of the analog parameters the state of the discreet parameters The parameters are listed below according to category The ECU related to the parameter is also indicated Transmission General Parameters System Coolant Temp Signal A T Input Revolution A T Pressure Control Solenoid A T Throttle Position A T Vehicle Speed A T Electrical Parameters Battery Voltage A T 4WD L Switch A T Brake Switch A T Gear Position A T Mode Select Switch A T O D Off Switch CON MON A T Park Neutral Position Signal A T Shift Solenoid No 1 amp No 2 A T TCC Solenoid A T Transmission Range A T Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 222 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application ABS General Parameters Wheel Speed RF LF RR LR ABS Battery Voltage ABS Fail Safe Relay ABS G Sensor ABS Pump Motor Relay ABS Pump Motor Voltage ABS Brake Switch ABS Hydraulic System ABS Hydraulic Unit Switch ABS Airbag Backup Voltage Airbag Battery Voltage Airbag Driver Airbag Initiator Resistance Airbag Driver Initiator Resistance A
172. ct DTC s mode do the following 1 Press to select the DTC s mode from the Select Mode menu 2 Rather than automatically displaying the DTC information some vehicles will display the following menu TROUBLE INFO Y TROUBLE INFO Y F0 DTC F3 CLEAR INFO F1 PENDING DTC F2 FREEZE DATA e Pending DTC and Freeze Frame not available for all ECUs F0 DTC To view current or history DTC s press The following screen will display DTC number the status of the DTC and the DTC description To scroll through multiple DTC s use to advance the screen and to return to the previous screen DTC P0130 C 02S SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION The status of the DTC is indicated by a single letter as follows C for Current H for History P for Pending F1 Pending DTC To view any pending DTC s press Gp If any pending DTC s are present they will be displayed in the format described above and will have a as the status indication If there are no pending DTC s present the tester will display a message to that effect Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 112 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application F2 Freeze Frame Data The vehicle s ECM saves diagnostic data information about the state of the vehicle when a Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC occurs This data is referred to as Freeze Frame Data and can be read by the tester using the FREEZE FRAME DATA mode You ca
173. ct the SNAPSHOT mode from the Select Mode menu 2 The trigger condition and review data options are displayed next in a self scrolling Snapshot Options menu To select a trigger option just press the Function Key displayed to the left of the desired trigger condition To replay previously captured data press To choose a specific DTC press GP in the Snapshot Options menu When the tester screen displays SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER DTC TO TRIGGER ON use numeric keys to enter the two digit DTC number that you have selected then press the key The tester will continue to store data until the specified DTC is detected or until you press the key If the DTC you enter does not exist for the engine type being tested an INVALID DTC message will be displayed and the code will have to be reentered Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 116 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS IN SNAPSHOT SET UP PHASE Return to Snapshot Options menu Select trigger condition Select Replay Data Select specific DTC Enter selected DTC To select a trigger condition press the function key to the left of the desired trigger condition To bypass the Data Capture phase and review previously captured data press Gp SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS REPLAY PREVIOUSLY CAPTURED DATA SELECT SINGLE DTC
174. d by the ECM PENDING DTC 3 P0443 P0110 P0111 A DTC description can be displayed for any DTC by moving the next to the desired DTC and pressing The is moved by pressing the or keys Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 64 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application RCV ENTER ENTER YES SEND Move up or down ENTER Display DTC description F2 Freeze Data For a description of Freeze Frame data see Mode F1 Freeze Frame Data on page 56 F3 Clear Diagnostic Information The Clear Diagnostic Information mode is used to clear DTCs from the vehicle s ECM along with any other diagnostic information which the controller has saved When you select Clear Info you are first prompted with a warning message This is to prevent accidental clearing of codes If you press in response to the prompt the tester will clear all emissions related information The Clear Info mode will clear the following information from the vehicle s ECM Clears number of diagnostic trouble codes e Clears all diagnostic trouble codes e Clears diagnostic trouble code for Freeze Frame data Clears Freeze Frame data Resets status of system monitoring tests Readiness Tests Clear All Diagnostic Info YES Continue NO Quit ACTIVE KEYS YES Clears all emission related information o Returns to Select Mode menu without clearing information
175. diator Fan OFF Notice the letters RAD displayed at the end of line 2 and the Radiator Fan state of operation ON OFF is displayed at the end of line 4 If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press CAR B to return to the Output Tests menu 7 Press CAR again to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Indicates Radiator Fan Control monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F RAD DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM ON Radiator Fan Control state Radiator Fan Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODE Select the RADIATOR FAN CONTROL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen Turn on the Radiator Fan Turn off the Radiator Fan Terminate the Radiator Fan Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu A C CONDENSER FAN The A C Condenser Fan Control mode allows you to turn the A C condenser fan control relay on and off To select A C Condenser Fan in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the A C COND FAN test from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake and securely block the wheels of the vehicle 3 Press to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that means ON and means OFF 5 Press to turn the A C Condenser Fan ON and to turn the A C Condenser Fan OFF N
176. display will indicate the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the key can always be used to force a trigger VEHICLE SPEED VEHICLE SPEED VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH 0 MPH 0 MPH GEAR POSITION GEAR POSITION GEAR POSITION P N R P N R T P N R 0 Waiting for Trigger Trigger Occurs Display Data Phase 6 Once the trigger occurs the tester will continue to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a flashing T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically and the tester goes to the Data Display phase For the ABS if a current trouble code is detected while the Snapshot mode is active a trigger automatically occurs and the tester advances to the data display phase The trouble code that caused the trigger can be viewed by selecting sample 1 7 Pressing 34 will terminate the Data Capture phase If the trigger has already occurred the Snapshot mode will move to the Data Display Phase ACTIVE KEYS G Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs hold Select RS232C Set Up menu Manual trigger Display captured data if trigger ha
177. e press GE When the tester displays CLEAR ALL DIAGNOSTIC INFO press to clear all information or to retain the information When is pressed the tester will display ALL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION CLEARING Following this display the tester will confirm whether the diagnostic information was successfully cleared by either displaying ALL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION CLEARED or ALL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION NOT CLEARED The tester will then return to the TROUBLE INFO menu When 19 is pressed all diagnostic information is retained in the ECM or PCM and the tester will return to the TROUBLE INFO menu 3 Press while using any of the above functions to return to the TROUBLE INFO menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 113 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application 4 Press SALB from the TROUBLE INFO menu to return to the SELECT MODE menu Vehicles with a Trouble Info Menu SELECT MODE y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S TROUBLE INFO 4 y F0 DTC F3 CLEAR INFO EXIT F1 PENDING DTC P F2 FREEZE DATA TROUBLE INFO Y DTC P0130 P F0 PXXX TROUBLE CODE CLEAR ALL o O2S SENSOR F1 PXXX 1ST P0130 DIAGNOSTIC INFO CIRCUIT F2 PXXX 2ND ENGINE SPEED MALFUNCTION F3 PXXX 3RD 1000 RPM YES NO EXIT ALL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INFORMATION P0130 ENGINE SPEED 1000 RPM EXIT CLEARING ALL DIAGNO
178. e Data Pairs VALVE state ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Advance to EVAP Canister Air Valve test Switch EVAP Canister Air Valve on while viewing parameters Switch EVAP Canister Air Valve off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 40 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application TANK PRESSURE VALVE The purpose of TANK PRES VAL mode is to diagnose the tank pressure control solenoid vacuum valve tank pressure control solenoid valve This mode allows you to control tank pressure control solenoid vacuum valve ON or OFF To operate the TANK PRES VAL mode do the following 1 Press amp or to position the on the display menu next to TANK PRES VAL then press 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu 3 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition switch to ON 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the Tank Pressure Control Valve is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys VAL is displayed at
179. e SNAPSHOT mode press 248 again to return to the Select Mode menu ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters amp Scroll through selected samples Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively Ge Display trouble codes for current sample Display cause of SNAPSHOT trigger Advance to first earliest sample Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample Toggle between MPH and km h display F8 Print current data sample Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to Snapshot Option menu MODE F4 MISC TESTS DELCO ABS VI SUBMODE F0 MANUAL CONTROL The Manual Control functions allow you to manually control each motor and solenoid for component diagnosis You can turn the solenoids on and off turn the ABS motors on and off and control their direction apply or release Opens shorts to ground and shorts to battery can be confirmed by comparing what is commanded by the tester what the ABS controller sees as a response motor feedbacks and what the actual output is at the actuator When the motor is moving the feedback current will be less than the command current When the piston is at the top or bottom of the bore or stuck the feedback current will equal the command current The solenoids will automatically be turned off if left on for more than 30 seconds and must be allowed to cool before b
180. e TCC solenoid OFF Electricity is not being passed to the TCC solenoid Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 163 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application THROTTLE OPEN RATE UNITS This parameter represents the signal which ECM outputs to TCM to inform the throttle opening Receiving a signal from the TP sensor ECM converts it into this parameter The parameter value increases as the throttle opening increases THROTTLE POSITION LEVEL NONE This parameter indicates the level zone of the throttle valve opening The throttle opening is divided into 8 levels zones from 0 about idle position to 7 about full open and signals are assigned to each opening level zone The PCM controls the automatic gear changes of the automatic transmission by using these signals according to the signal from the TP sensor TRANS RANGE D RANGE SHIFT SWITCH STATES The Trans Range parameter reads D RANGE when the transmission is shifted to any drive range R D 2 or L range This signal informs the ECM or PCM that a load has been applied to the engine so the ECM or PCM can adjust fuel compensation and IAC accordingly The Trans Range shift signal is also indicated for manual transmissions but should be ignored TRANS RANGE P R N D 2 L This parameter indicates the position of the transmission range switch It is used as one of the signals to control the fuel injector IAC valve and automatic trans
181. e during this ignition cycle History Code A fault which occurred during a previous cycle The tester distinguishes between current and history codes by displaying CURRENT for Current codes and HISTORY for History codes 6 For the ABS VI system the tester performs analysis on the codes which are present and displays information on the most likely cause of the codes This information is displayed immediately after the ABS DTC display has been completed See Figure 5 3 The Antilock Brake System features a sophisticated on board diagnostic system that under most fault conditions will specifically identify the cause of the fault detected Because of this pinpointing ability there are some conditions where more than one trouble code will be stored when certain faults occur The ABS FAULT ISOLATION feature identifies multiple trouble codes that can be caused by common area faults and will display the probable source of the fault not available for ABS DBC7 Consult the service manual to verify the isolation has not been caused by a catastrophic failure or a series of faults that Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 263 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application occurred over a period of time Under these conditions the FAULT ISOLATION information may not identify the actual source of the fault SELECT MODE v F0 DATA LIST F2 DTC CODES WAITING FOR DATA S
182. e radiator fan motor and its circuit This mode allows you to control radiator fan motor to running or not running To operate the RDT FAN CONT mode do the following 1 Press amp or to position the on the display menu next to RDT FAN CNT then press 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu 3 Set the parking brake and block the wheels 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the radiator fan motor is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys RDT is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the radiator fan motor is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions RDT Fan Control mode will be terminated switch closed throttle position is off Vehicle speed detected e Coolant Temp gt 110 5 control the radiator fan motor off press the key To turn it on press the key 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the RDT Fan control to the ECM Operation of the RDT Fan Control mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 45 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST Ay RDT FAN C
183. ear the trouble codes use Mode F2 TROUBLE CODES to display the current Trouble Codes Repair the cause of the trouble code s then clear the codes using Mode F2 When all current trouble codes have been cleared select F0 DATA LIST again to display vehicle data 2 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the CO keys 3 You may return to the select mode menu by pressing GM VIEWING ECU DATA PARAMETERS In order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time the tester displays data parameters in preassigned pairs The first data pair displayed after you press is shown in the following figure Also shown is how to scroll through the Data List with the and keys and how to create your own data pairs with the and keys To see other preassigned pairs press either the or key For ECU No 13 press either or instead of or Qe The or key will cause the tester to scroll forward through the list of preassigned pairs while the or key will cause scrolling backwards Chapter 8 contains descriptions of all data parameters Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 194 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE MODE SELECT SW NORMAL TRANS RANGE P VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P N R THROTTLE POS 0 GEAR POSITION
184. ed to the relay coil PUMP MOTOR VOLTAGE Low High Pump Motor Voltage is an analog input signal read by the ABS control module Certain ABS control module functions will be modified if the Pump Motor voltage falls below or rises above programmed thresholds MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS BRAKE SWITCH Off On This switch signal informs the ABS control module whether the brake is active or not HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Operating Not Operating This parameter indicates whether the ABS is functional or not HYDRAULIC UNIT SWITCH Off On This parameter indicates whether the ABS is functional or not AIRBAG ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS BATTERY VOLTAGE Volts Battery Voltage is an analog input signal read by the SDM Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 227 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application BACKUP VOLTAGE UNITS This parameter indicates the capacity of the backup condenser installed to maintain the ignition current as much as possible even when the power supply that ignites the inflator is shut off DRIVER INITIATOR RESISTANCE DRIVER AIRBAG INITIATOR RESISTANCE Ohms Q 0 12 75 This parameter indicates the resistance of the driver s airbag initiator circuit DRIVER PRETENSIONER INITIATOR RESISTANCE Ohms This parameter indicates the resistance of the driver s seatbelt pretensioner initiator circuit IGNITION VOLTAGE Volts 0 28 5 Ignition Voltage is an analog input signal read by the S
185. ed trouble code Return to Snapshot Options menu SELECT MODE Avy F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE F3 SNAPSHOT REPLAY PREVIOUSLY CAPTURED DATA SELECT SINGLE CODE VEHICLE SPEED SNAPSHOT OPTIONS SNAPSHOT MODE SNAPSHOT 0 MPH F0 ANY CODE ENTER ECU CODE ENTER TROUBLE GEAR POSITION F1 SINGLE CODE TO TRIGGER ON XX or CODE XXXX P N R 0 F2 MANUAL TRIG THEN PRESS ENTER DTC ENTER F3 REPLAY DATA Code then ENTER DATA CAPTURE PHASE YENICEE SPEED GEAR POSITION P N R w More Data Parameters For ABS with ECU No 2 made by Sumitomo Denko F1 NOT AVAIL is displayed FIGURE 5 6 Snapshot Setup Phase Select Trigger Condition or Display Previously Captured Data To select a trigger condition press the function key to the left of the desired trigger condition To bypass the Data Capture phase and review previously captured data press F3 REPLAY DATA DATA CAPTURE PHASE To capture data in the Snapshot mode do the following 4 Once the trigger condition is selected the tester begins storing A T or ABS data parameters and trouble codes while displaying the Data List parameters Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 205 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application 5 The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter as well as all trouble codes are saved for each sample The data
186. eing turned back on An INHIBITED message is displayed on line 1 if additional cooling time is required To run the Manual Control test do the following 1 Press GJ to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See Important on page 253 2 For AWD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press af to select the Manual Control Test 4 A display confirming that you have entered the Manual Control test is displayed for four seconds or until the key is pressed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 274 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application 5 A screen explaining which tester keys are used to control the various functions is displayed until you press the key 6 The function selection menu displays all of the functions which you can control in this test along with the function key to press to select a function Note that the top row of function keys control tests for the Left Front wheel functions The next row of function keys control the same functions for the Right Front wheel Rear wheel components are controlled by function keys on the bottom row GE and The selection is arranged so the first key in a row controls motor apply the second key controls motor release and the third key controls solenoids MOTOR MOTOR SOLENOID APPLY RELEASE LF FO Fl F2 LF APPLY LF RELEASE SOLENOID RF F4 F5 F62 RF APPLY RF RELEASE SOLENOID R
187. eis 191 ECU COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS 192 MODE FO DATA LISE 14454024 6944465 0 R14 ORE RE EER ODER CORREOS 194 BCO Data Parameter soba PLES LE RA Gd pe ET RIPE E APR AA PI P HR RI APP A 194 Create TON OWRD PAYS da dated aint cod eem came ba Edi adire Ps 195 Fanne TENE nautas iac Raich de pa dB pridie den dd d dab qd 195 MODEPERFRINT DATA EEG GUERRE EGRE ERG FR RE S Ed 196 MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES 6055449164605 CORRE EAP 198 ek gab ee b E dale b eile cnt 199 dired sudpaded edd dad Rud dud as 201 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT SG ged dar dO b Pac OE Da UR EG REOR Pad 203 JUD ONU cdi des bee tes tse Eu PAD E eRe Re ve 203 Viewing Cuphoeed Dald 242406055 ak Rau sq EAR AR AUGERE RU ERO EORR GERE RR 203 PANES Capinred JM wad dip bala ERE wad eed Pe Qe eae EK 204 DugpsboL SONIS PRSE 1o NEC aed be bebe EHE AE Rs Rees 204 IN CONGU ITUNES Qexgesqs quee SER Sepe eee wea duda uma cad tha dede 205 Iusto HOD PRESE cas hha dak poe Mea emm bd ated qd ae ae 206 MODE F4 MISCELLANEOUS TESTS GOES GU RE CERE x 210 Abende TO VAGUE ORIOL ea aids adelaide wee een cA Oe REAR AERA eae eT UAE 210 eee rS 213 7 TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTIONS 214 B PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
188. enne DE 242320340044 a 22 PRA CAPRICE DA is oc cen OEA A E 23 MODE Fa MISC TESIS Rei d 27 EP OON OD ses ts dy bts cp deals hn Be de Ae eas deae dra ode 27 FED SPARK SL dap dabo dd Rhine ARDY RDQS RAE T WP APA NA NEA 29 DIE al ta aeta Ja unir ace pes E db Esdrae qe pd ae 31 EGR SOL TALIE doped a d pO Ob BAUR MORE OH CR RE 33 DOSE ado ded pd 35 SLEPPING EGR CONTRO dd XR dace eed du EE N 37 CH RB WARE ups Qu cete du Darei Died iudicat d e da Kc 39 TANK PRESSURE ERLEN dope dob sd PEOR B RR E PRAG 41 CANISTER PURGE edd abdo debug 43 POT PINCONIROL please eh dad deb d dad dod od qoe dp qe d Pod doped RI Ea 45 CONTROL ees ide pec de ge eed aqq 47 PROGRAM ID a a kia gated eee OR E ab REOR AEG REAR RES 49 OPERATING THE TEST MODES IN CARB MODE 50 PRECARD s cieeeeseeariesecieeaei dene eneeiews esas 50 MODE FECURRENT DATA 51 Current Data ae 51 Orc 51 xd Ge DEAE Reda atq dads 53 MODE Fi FREEZE PRAME DATA gacsig
189. ension relief sequence and then informs you that the sequence has been completed Press the key to scroll to the next screen which instructs you to turn the ignition OFF After the ignition key is turned OFF the tester instructs you to remove the motor pack from the hydraulic modulator assembly Refer to the service manual for the proper procedure 6 The tester instructs you to connect the motor pack wiring to the motor pack position the motor pack so that the gears are clear of all objects and then turn the ignition back ON 7 The tester will guide you through a series of actions to perform and questions to answer If an is displayed in the lower right corner of the display press the key after the action is completed to continue to the next page of instructions If the tester asks a question answer by pressing the or GOED key 8 After all tests have been performed the tester displays the test results If the test failed rerun the Motor Test to verify the results 9 Press SAID to return to the Select Test menu ACTIVE KEYS Select Motor Pack test Advance screen after performing requested action amp Answer questions on the tester display Start motor pack diagnosis Return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 281 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT ABS TEST F4 MOTOR TEST F5 GEAR TENSION F6 RELAY TEST AUTO
190. ents short term corrections to the air fuel mixture computation A value of 0 indicates no correction a value greater than 0 means an enrichment correction and a value less than 0 implies a deficiency correction If appears in the tester screen the vehicle being tested is not equipped with this sensor Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 155 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD I Application MIXTURE CONTROL LEARN MIXTURE CONTROL LEARN B1 amp B2 B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK UNITS NONE The Mixture Control Learn Value represents long term corrections to the air fuel mixture computation A value of 0 indicates no correction a value greater than 0 means an enrichment correction and a value less than 0 implies a deficiency correction If appears in the tester screen the vehicle being tested is not equipped with this sensor MIXTURE CONTROL MONITOR MIXTURE CONTROL MONITOR B1 amp B2 B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK NONE The value of Mixture Control Monitor is obtained by combining the values of the Mixture CONTROL DWELL and MIXTURE CONTROL LEARN values This value indicates the necessary correction to keep the air fuel mixture stoichiometrical If appears in the tester screen the vehicle being tested is not equipped with this sensor NEEDLE SENSOR VOLTAGE V The ECM detects the start of needle movement by triggering on the rising edge of the needle movement
191. enu selection Return to previous step amp Scroll through test mode selection menus and control display of captured data Select and control test mode Toggles between Metric and English units Print Data List parameters Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 3 2 GETTING STARTED SETTING UP THE TESTER The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter or adapter cable for the vehicle being tested must be connected to the tester DLC Cable in order to connect the tester to the vehicle The following Vehicle Adapter Chart identifies which adapters and cables are required to connect each type of tester to the various Suzuki vehicles All adapters cables and any other hardware required to connect the tester to the vehicle are listed in the chart The figure number in the chart refers to the adapter and cable illustrations on the following pages SYSTEM TESTER ADAPTER DESCRIPTION FIGURE Engine System MTS 3100 Type 3 16 14 Pin P N 02001969 Figure 2 1 with 16 Pin Connector Tech 1A Type 3 16 14 Pin P N 02001969 Figure 2 2 OBD 1 Tech 1 OBD II VIM P N 02001808 Figure 2 3 16 14 Pin VIM Adapter Cable P N 02001744 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 4 2 Getting Started ECM II Application MTS 3100 16 14 Pin Type 3 Adapter Cable FIGURE 2 1 MTS 3100 Adapter and Cables Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 5 2 Getting Started II Application
192. erify that a master cartridge is installed Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with alcohol Try a different master cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 168 A If You re Having a Problem ECM OBD 1 Application KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM SPORADICALLY RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE SUZUKI MASS STORAGE ENGLISH 1 71 CARTRIDGE VX X or lt ENTER gt FRANCAIS Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes Master Cartridge loose or dirty contacts Tester malfunction Recommendations e Cycle power to the tester unplug amp replug the serial data link connector Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector e Check serial data link cable amp connector for wear or corrosion TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA POSSIBLE WRONG SERIAL DATA FAIL ECU BOSCH ECM ECM SELECTED NO CHECK DATA LINK NO RESPONSE NO DATA DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT CHECK ALDL AND RESELECT EXIT EXIT CONNECTION Most Likely Cause e or PCM serial data link connector cable problems Other Possible Causes Serial data link cable loose or bad or connector pins loose or corroded Bad ECM or PCM Recommendations Verify a good serial data link cable connection Cycle power to the tester Run the tester Self test Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 169 A If You re Having a Problem ECM OBD 1 Application
193. essing the G key in the Data List or Snapshot Replay modes Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 195 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application SELECT MODE 4 Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE MODE SELECT SW NORMAL TRANS RANGE P VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P N R THROTTLE POS 0 GEAR POSITION P N R VEHICLE SPEED TRANS RANGE P VEHICLE SPEED 0MPH GEAR POSITION P N R VEHICLE SPEED iE OMPH THROTTLE POS 0 VEHICLE SPEED TRANS RANGE THROTTLE POS P 0 0 MPH o GEAR POSITION GEAR POSITION GEAR POSITION PINI R P NIR P N R FIGURE 5 2 Example of Selecting and Displaying Data Pairs ACTIVE KEYS NO Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs hold Select RS232C Set Up menu G3 Print data list parameters Return to the Select Mode menu MODE F1 PRINT DATA When the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed in the Tech 1 or if you are using a Tech 1A or MTS 3100 tester the Print Data mode allows you to print the VIN system type and Data List to a serial printer or terminal This is the data list sent by the ECU to the tester The data list parameters can be printed without printin
194. ester Operator s Manual BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause gnition switch OFF Other Possible Causes e Faulty cable tester power supply is malfunctioning No power is applied to the tester Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 230 A If You re Having a Problem BCM Application DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause Two master cartridges are installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Make sure that only one master cartridge is installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try installing another master cartridge MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Master cartridge is not installed Other Possible Causes Dirty contacts on the master cartridge connector Two master cartridges installed Recommendations e Verify that a master cartridge is installed Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with alcohol Try a different master cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 231 A If You re Having a Problem BCM Application KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM SPORADICALLY RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE SUZUKI SUZUKI MASS
195. f there is no requirement for data sharing between the vehicle s components during normal operation the link can be implemented as a diagnostics only link Numerous diagnostic modes provide a maximum of system flexibility Interface to the serial data link can be implemented using standard UART type devices communicating at a 7812 or 15625 baud rate The interface devices required for this phase are available as stand alone devices or integrated with CPUs or MPUs in a large number of micro controllers Network access is via a master slave protocol The serial data link can have at most one device functioning as the master at any point in time The tester controls all communications on the serial data link A slave device ECM can transmit data only after it has been interrogated by the master device A typical operating scenario is for the master device to periodically send a polling message to one or more of the slave devices The slaves can then send a response message containing for example the states of the slave s inputs or internal parameters back to the master Once the tester has gotten control of the serial data link it can perform diagnostics on any of the devices connected to serial data link which support serial data diagnostics It is important to note that the tester can only perform diagnostics which were provided for in the design of the various components Hooks in the software of the on board components must be provided i
196. few simple steps Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem If the problem appears to be in the tester perform the Self test described in the Operators Manual BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause gnition switch OFF Other Possible Causes Faulty cable Tester power supply is malfunctioning No power is applied to the tester Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 167 A If You re Having a Problem ECM OBD 1 Application DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause Two master cartridges are installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Make sure that only one master cartridge is installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try installing another master cartridge MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Master cartridge is not installed Other Possible Causes Dirty contacts on the master cartridge connector Two master cartridges installed Recommendations e V
197. g models NORTH AMERICAN MARKET YEAR MODEL SYSTEM MEG 1995 SWIFT 1000 1300 ABS ABS VI 2WD 4WSS DELCO SW310 413 AIRBAG SDM AI DELCO 1996 99 SWIFT 1000 1300 ABS ABS VI 2WD 4WSS DELCO SW310 413 AIRBAG SDM I DELCO 1996 08 SIDEKICK X90 ABS ABS VI 2WD 3WSS DELCO SE416 SZ416 ABS ABS VI 4WD 3WSS DELCO AIRBAG SDM I DELCO 1999 VITARA ABS DBC7 2WD 4WSS DELPHI SQ416 420 ABS DBC7 4WD 4WSS DELPHI AIRBAG SDM I DELCO 1999 GRAND VITARA AIRBAG SDN I DELCO SQ625 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 238 1 Suzuki ABS Airbag Application Description ABS Airbag Application OTHER THAN NORTH AMERICAN MARKET MODEL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER SE416 ABS ABS VI 2WD 3WSS DELCO ABS ABS VI 4WD 3WSS DELCO 57416 ABS ABS VI 2WD 3 55 DELCO ABS ABS VI 4WD 3WSS DELCO AIRBAG SDM I DELCO The Suzuki ABS Airbag Application and the Vetronix tester team up to become a diagnostic tool which is both powerful and easy to use With the Vetronix tester you can select test modes which let you Display diagnostic data parameters Display and clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs Diagnose intermittent problems by capturing and storing multiple samples of system data before and after the problem occurs then examining the data to determine the problem This data is saved in memory for at least one half hour even if the power is removed Display
198. g tested More information about each model and model year is included in Chapter 1 SELECTING A COMMUNICATIONS MODE For models other than SY418 SQ series and JA627 the Communications Mode display lists two options F0 CARB MODE and F1 SUZUKI MODE The CARB MODE provides diagnosis of OBD II equipped vehicles using CARB OBD II methods The SUZUKI MODE provides enhancements specific to Suzuki vehicles Press af to select CARB MODE or to select SUZUKI MODE XXXX MY F0 CARB MODE F1 SUZUKI MODE If Snapshot data has been stored on the CARB MODE side when af is pressed the following screen is displayed FO OBD II FUNCTIONS F1 REPLAY SNAP SHOT DATA Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 11 4 Selecting The Model Year Communications Mode amp Test Mode ECM OBD II Application F0 CARB MODE INITIALIZATION OF COMMUNICATIONS When F0 CARB MODE or F0 OBD II FUNCTIONS is selected from the start up menu the tester will attempt to communicate with the vehicle Be sure the ignition key is on Initializing OBD II Communications After FO CARB MODE or F0 OBD II FUNCTIONS is selected communication initialization can take up to four seconds In some cases a SWITCHING COMMUNICATION MODE screen is displayed prior to the screen shown above COMMUNICATION FAILURE If the tester fails to get a response from the vehicle it will display a retry count and one of two error messages At that point it w
199. g the VIN or type by pressing the key in the Data List or Snapshot Replay mode Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 196 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application To print the data do the following 1 Press Gp to select Print Data from the Select Mode menu FOR ECU NO 2 MADE BY SUMITOMO DENKO When you are testing the ABS if a current trouble code is present when Print Data is selected or if a current trouble code is detected while the Print Data mode is active the tester displays the following message NOTE CURRENT TROUBLE CODE SET DATA NO LONGER VALID ENTER For the ABS current trouble codes cause the ABS control module to send invalid data to the tester Therefore data displayed in Data List Print Data and Snapshot modes is not valid and should not be used for diagnosing the vehicle To clear the trouble codes use Mode F2 TROUBLE CODES to display the current Trouble Codes Repair the cause of the trouble code s then clear the codes using Mode F2 When all current trouble codes have been cleared select F1 PRINT DATA again to print the vehicle data 2 The VIN entry screen is the first screen displayed in this mode Use the keys on the tester keypad to enter the last six digits of the vehicle s VIN then press 19 9 This information is printed out as part of the header information that accompanies each Data List print out The next screen requires the
200. g the engine s response is available while the EGR is being controlled Nn 6 Press CAR to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return EGR Control to the ECM or PCM Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 128 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT MISC TEST F3 EGR CONTROL SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS START ENGINE THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER OPEN THROTTLE TO 1500 4000 RPM 1600 RPM THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates EGR Control mode COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F EGR 40 C 104 F EGR INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 C 104 F OFF More Data Pairs More Data Pairs ACTIVE KEYS FOR EGR CONTROL MODE amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed ENTER Advance to EGR Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Switch EGR control on while viewing parameters Switch EGR control off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu STEPPING EGR CONTROL The Stepping EGR Control mode allows you to regulate the Stepping EGR opening in increments from 0 to 100 and displays the stepping EGR monitor value as a percentage The tester initializes the Stepping EGR opening to the current value 0 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 129 5 Selecting and Operating the
201. he EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve test is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 33 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST AY EGR SOL VAL STEP EGR EGR SOL CHk ENTER CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates EGR SOL VALVE mode EGR SOL VALVE XXX EGR EGR SOL VAL CHK XXX ON YES Indicates More Data Pairs EGR SOL VALVE state ACTIVE KEYS Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units ENTER Advance to EGR SOL VALVE Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Switch the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve on while viewing parameters Switch the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 34 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application EGR SOL CHECK The purpose of EGR SOL CHECK mode is to diagnose the EGR Diagnostic Valve EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check This mode allows you to control the valve ON or OFF To operate the EGR SOL CHECK mode do the following 1 Pres
202. he Pump Motor Test do the following 1 Press to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu 2 Press Gp to select the Pump Motor Test During the pump motor test the command for that motor is sampled Those samples are displayed on the tester screen During the Pump Motor Test pressing the key turns ON the COMMAND and pressing the key turns it OFF or it will go to OFF after 5 seconds have elapsed If INHIBITED appears on the display when trying to turn ON the COMMAND from OFF wait until it disappears 3 Press SAID to return to the Select Mode menu SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TEST F1 PUMP MOTOR MOTOR COMMANDED OFF PUMP FEEDBACK y OFF 11 6V OFF FIGURE 5 13 Pump Motor Test SUBMODE F2 RELAY TEST The Relay test allows monitoring the voltage available to the EBCM while turning the Electronic Brake Control Relay ON and OFF When the relay is commanded ON the voltage should be equal to the battery voltage When the relay is OFF the voltage should drop below five volts NOTE Voltage will not drop to zero when the relay contacts are open due to capacitors in the EBCM If voltage drops below five volts the relay is operating properly Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 293 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application To run the Relay Test do the following 1 Press GJ to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select the Relay Te
203. he clearing was successful the tester instructs you to turn the ignition switch off then on Press to return to the Trouble Codes menu 5 Press 3A to terminate the trouble codes mode and return to the Select Mode menu ACTIVE KEYS hold Select RS232C Set Up menu Clear all stored ECU trouble codes YES Clear all stored ECU trouble codes o Return to display trouble codes Codes are not cleared 5 Stop automatic display scrolling then used to manually control the display Terminate the trouble code display and return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 201 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application TROUBLE CODES F0 DISPLAY CODES F1 LAMP CLEAR F2 LOCK CLEAR CLEAR THE WARNING LAMP YES NO CLEARING THE WARNING LAMP WARNING LAMP NOT CLEARED CRASH DATA FULL REPLACE SDM WARNING LAMP CLEARED FIGURE 5 4 F1 Lamp Clear TROUBLE CODES F0 DISPLAY CODES F1 LAMP CLEAR F2 LOCK CLEAR CLEAR THE NEAR DEPLOY LOCK YES NO CLEARING THE NEAR DEPLOY LOCK NEAR DEPLOY LOCK NEAR DEPLOY LOCK CLEARED NOT CLEARED TURN THE IGN SW OFF THEN ON FIGURE 5 5 F2 Lock Clear Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 202 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The SNAPSHOT mode is not available when testing Airbag systems or AB
204. he idle up circuit ON and the key is used to turn the idle up circuit OFF Press to continue to the next display 6 The tester displays the state to which you have commanded the idle up circuit ON or OFF the circuit s status ACTIVE or INACTIVE and the circuit s condition OK or FAILED When you press the or key the tester will command the idle up circuit to the state you select 7 Press CAI to return to the Select Test menu Press G4 again to display the Select System menu ACTIVE KEYS Select Manual Control test Select Idle Up system Turns idle up circuit ON Turns idle up circuit OFF Return to Select Tests menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 279 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F3 IDLE UP SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL MANUAL CONTROL OF IDLE UP CIRCUIT 4 Seconds or keypress TURN ON TURN OFF YES TO CONTINUE IDLE UP TEST COMMANDED OFF IDLE UP INACTIVE or ACTIVE IDLE CKT FAILED or OK IDLE UP TEST COMMANDED ON IDLE UP INACTIVE or ACTIVE EXIT IDLE CKT FAILED or OK FIGURE 5 10 Idle Up Test SUBMODE F4 MOTOR TEST Once the motor pack has been separated from the ABS hydraulic modulator the Motor Pack Test will functionally test the motor pack for proper operation If the motor pack is still attached to the modulator the tester wi
205. hicle select mode EXIT Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 105 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of the DATA LIST mode is to passively monitor data which is being transmitted from the ECM or PCM during normal operation of the vehicle This mode does not affect vehicle operation and you can use it to read data to see if it is correct or at least reasonable The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units This means you don t have to hunt through manuals to find out what is being displayed The data parameters are displayed in pre programmed pairs You can also create your own pairs through the process explained on the following pages To select Data List mode do the following 1 Press to select the DATA LIST mode from the Select Mode menu 2 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the QT9 keys 3 Return to the Select Mode menu at any time by pressing 941 Operation of the DATA LIST mode is summarized in the flow diagrams on the following pages ACTIVE KEYS FOR DATA LIST amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs G3 Print Data List Return to select mode menu VIEWING DATA PAR
206. ill continue to retry the communications approximately every 3 seconds If the communication problem is resolved e g the ignition is switched to ON and communications begin the tester will automatically proceed to the next phase OBD II Interface Circuitry Not Installed Initialization Failed XX Retrying SELECTING THE TEST MODES The tester makes selecting the test mode easy by displaying a list of tests a test mode menu The menu also displays which key is used to select each test mode To select a test mode simply press the key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 12 4 Selecting The Model Year Communications Mode amp Test Mode ECM OBD II Application SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS MENU FOR CARB MODE Once communications with the vehicle have been established the SELECT MODE menu is displayed In some cases a Readiness Tests warning message is displayed prior to the menu See the READINESS TESTS section SELECT MODE Y FO Current Data F1 Freeze Data F2 Trouble Codes SELECT MODE Y F3 Clear Info F4 O2S Results F5 Readiness Tst SELECT MODE v F6 Onboard Tests Select the desired function by pressing the key indicated to the left of the function NOTE EH F4 O2S Results is only available for 1996 97 Model Year vehicles The menu scrolls every 3 seconds until or is pressed at which time scrolling stops Pressing amp
207. information about the state of the vehicle at the time the DTC occurred Control various components solenoids relays pump motors Perform special diagnostic procedures on vehicles equipped with ABS Print data if the tester is connected to a serial printer This information can be analyzed and displayed to assist you in diagnosing ABS and Airbag problems HOW THE SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG APPLICATION WORKS WITH THE VETRONIX TESTER The tester lets you monitor data and control Electronic Control Unit ECU operation by communicating with the ECU via the serial Data Link Connector DLC present in the vehicle The tester consists of a microcomputer which communicates with the ECU and controls its operation a keypad to receive directions from you and a display to provide the data you need to diagnose vehicle electronic problems The tester communicates with the ECU by applying an electrical signal to the serial DLC pin then reads the ECU data signal from one of the DLC pins translates it and then displays the serial data on the display screen The SUZUKI ABS AIRBAG Application in the Suzuki Application Cartridge is the software program which performs all of the functions described in this manual General Key Functions NO Answer questions asked on tester display and select data parameters to monitor EXIT Return to previous step Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 239 1 Suzuki ABS Airbag Application Description A
208. ink connector and conversing with the ECM the ECM ignores input signals from the TEST switch and the DIAG switch in the vehicle service connector Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 17 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application SUZUKI MODE ECM COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS Most test modes display data Therefore these test modes require the ECM to send data to the tester When you select a SUZUKI MODE test you may see one or more of the following ECM communications status displays WRONG WAITING FOR DATA TURN KEY TO RUN ENGINE SYSTEM SELECTED EXIT amp RESELECT POSSIBLE WRONG SERIAL DATA FAIL ECM SELECTED NO CHECK DATA LINK DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT AND RESELECT EXIT Display A This means that the tester cannot yet display data as it has not yet received a complete data message from the ECM This display is sometimes seen right after selecting a test mode Display B This is a reminder that the ignition key needs to be in the ON position for the tester to communicate with the vehicle Display C This occurs when the tester determines that the data stream it receives from the ECM does not match the vehicle that you have selected If this happens return to the vehicle select step by pressing 2489 Double check your selection Display D This occurs when the tester has not received any data from the ECM In this case you should verify that the ignition is ON a
209. int Data to Trouble Codes to Snapshot to Misc Tests SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS FIGURE 5 1 Select Mode Menu To select a test mode simply press the tester key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu Since there are up to five test modes the keys are used Up to three test modes are shown as soon as the ECU is selected If other test modes are available the display automatically scrolls to the next display after three seconds The display automatically scrolls Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 191 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application between the menu screens To stop the automatic scrolling press either the or key The menu may then be manually changed by pressing either the or All multiple menus of more than three items scroll in this way Regardless of which test modes are displayed any test mode can be selected at any time from the menu ACTIVE KEYS Select Test mode Stop automatic menu scrolling then used to manually control the menu display EXIT Return to System Selection menu ECU COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS Most tester test modes display data Therefore these test modes require the ECU to send data to the tester When you select a test mode you may see one or more of the following tester ECU communications status displays POSSIBLE WRONG WAITIN
210. ion MISC TEST Ay EGR SOL VAL STEP EGR EGR SOL CHK ENTER CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates EGR SOL VALVE CHK mode EGR SOL VAL CHK XXX ECK EXIT ENGINE SPEED XXX ON Indicates EGR SOL VALVE M Data Pai ore Data Pairs CHK state amp Scroll through displayed data parameters BD Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Advance to EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Switch EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check on while viewing parameters Switch EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check off while viewing parameters Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 36 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application STEPPING EGR CONTROL The purpose of Stepping EGR mode is to diagnose the EGR valve The Stepping EGR Control mode allows you to regulate the Stepping EGR opening in increments from 0 to 100 and displays the stepping EGR monitor value as a percentage To operate the Stepping EGR mode do the following 1 Press amp or EF to position the on the display menu next
211. ion range other than P or N range for A T vehicle 36 IAC CAL CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 80 C Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 122 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD I Application ECM NO CONT OUTPUT CONTROL CONDITION 1 3 4 6 9 11 12 EGR Control Engine Speed less than 1500 RPM or greater than 4000 RPM Coolant Temperature less than 70 C EGR Control Engine Speed less than 1500 RPM or greater than 4000 RPM Coolant Temperature less than 70 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 7 10 14 Stepping EGR Control Engine Speed less than 200 RPM Coolant Temperature less than 70 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 13 Stepping EGR Control Engine Speed less than 200 RPM Coolant Temperature less than 55 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 15 Stepping EGR Control Engine Speed greater than 3500 RPM Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 76 C 16 Stepping EGR Control Vehicle Speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 70 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 17 EGR Control Engine Speed less than 1500 RPM or greater than 4000 RPM Vehicle Speed detected 18 Stepping EGR Control Engine Speed less than 3000 RPM DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected
212. irbag Driver Pretensioner Initiator Resistance Airbag Ignition Voltage Airbag Passenger Airbag Initiator Resistance Airbag Passenger Initiator Resistance Airbag Passenger Pretensioner Initiator Resistance Airbag System ID Airbag Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 223 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application Miscellaneous Parameters Warning Lamp Airbag TRANSMISSION GENERAL PARAMETERS COOLANT TEMP SIGNAL STATES Coolant Temperature Signal is used for the overdrive control When this signal is LOW the gear position is not shifted to 4th INPUT REVOLUTION RPM 0 6375 Input shaft revolution is the revolution of the input shaft torque converter turbine shaft in the transmission case It is computed by reference pulses coming from the input shaft revolution sensor or turbine shaft revolution sensor in the transmission PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID 0 0 100 Pressure Control Solenoid is used for the shift change control in the transmission It is operated by timing pulses coming from the TCM THROTTLE POSITION 0 0 100 Throttle Position is a TCM internal parameter It is computed by duty signal coming from the ECM Throttle Position is used for the shift solenoid control in the TCM VEHICLE SPEED KPH 0 255 MPH 0 159 Vehicle speed is a TCM internal parameter It is computed by timing pulses coming from the vehicle speed sensor for A T Vehicle speed is
213. is parameter indicates the state of the O D OFF Switch Overdrive cut switch When this switch is ON the gear position is not shifted to 4th PNP SIGNAL P N RANGE D RANGE PNP Signal displays the transmission gear range based on the state of the Park Neutral Position signal Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 162 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID CON ON OFF This parameter indicates the PCM has commanded the pressure regulator solenoid ON or OFF PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID MON ON OFF The monitor result of the pressure regulator solenoid circuit is displayed ON Electricity is being passed to the pressure regulator solenoid OFF Electricity is not being passed to the pressure regulator solenoid SHIFT SOLENOID 1 CON SHIFT SOLENOID 2 CON ON OFF This parameter indicates the PCM has commanded the shift solenoid ON or OFF SHIFT SOLENOID 1 MON SHIFT SOLENOID 2 MON ON OFF The monitor result of the shift solenoid circuit is displayed ON Electricity is being passed to the shift solenoid OFF Electricity is not being passed to the shift solenoid TCC SOLENOID CON ON OFF This parameter indicates that the PCM has commanded the Torque Converter Clutch TCC Solenoid ON or OFF TCC SOLENOID MON STATES The monitor result of the TCC solenoid circuit is displayed ON Electricity is being passed to th
214. is removed from the tester Control engine functions such as RPM except CARB mode Control various solenoids and valves on or off to check for proper operation except CARB mode Read ECM configuration information SUZUKI mode only Print data and vehicle information Read A T data parameters vehicle equipped with PCM Read diagnostic trouble codes except SUZUKI mode Clear diagnostic information except SUZUKI mode Read freeze frame data except SUZUKI mode Read the status of various on board tests except SUZUKI mode Read pending diagnostic trouble codes except SUZUKI mode Page 1 1 Suzuki ECM 11 Application Description ECM OBD II Application VEHICLE COVERAGE The Suzuki ECM OBD II Application is capable of monitoring and diagnosing the Suzuki engine and emission control systems on all models equipped as follows FUEL ENGINE TRANS ECU YEAR MODEL SYS ECU MFG SIZE TYPE TYPE TYPE 1996 97 ESTEEM 1 6L MFI MT ECM DENSO SY416 4AT 1998 ESTEEM 1 6L SFI MT ECM DENSO SY416 4AT 1996 SWIFT 1 0L TBI MT ECM DENSO SW310 1996 97 SWIFT 1 3L TBI MT ECM DENSO SW413 3AT PCM 1998 SWIFT 1 3L SFI MT ECM DENSO SW413 3AT PCM 1996 SIDEKICK 1 6L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI SE416 4AT 1997 98 SIDEKICK 1 6L SFI MT ECM MITSUBISHI SE416 4AT PCM 1996 X 90 1 6L SFI MT ECM MITSUBI
215. isplay for monitoring the engine s response is available while the Fuel Pump is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and Qf keys FEL is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the Fuel Pump is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions the Fuel Pump Control mode will be terminated Engine speed detected Vehicle speed detected e Fuel tank level lt 15 5 To control the Fuel Pump off press the key To turn it on press the key 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the Fuel Pump control to the ECM Operation of the Fuel Pump Control mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 47 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST v RDT FAN CNT FUEL PUMP CNT PROGRAM ID ENTER ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED SET BRAKE STOP ENGINE IGNITION ON THEN PRESS ENTER Indicates FUEL PUMP CONTROL ENTER CANIST VENT VAL XXX FEL TANK PRES VALVE ED XXX ON Indicates FUEL PUMP More Data Pairs state ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for cre
216. itten by a new SNAPSHOT or if the tester is disconnected from the serial data link connector or the cigarette lighter for at least one half hour Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 115 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application NOTE Please note that all data captured during SNAPSHOT will be erased from tester once you select FO EURO MODE in the communication mode display You can also view Snapshot data when you are not connected to a vehicle Answer vehicle selection prompts and select any Suzuki Mode vehicle The tester will attempt to communicate with a vehicle in order to complete the vehicle selection process Since it is not connected to a vehicle it will display the following screen POSSIBLE WRONG ECM SELECTED NO DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT Press the 241 key If the tester detects the presence of previously stored snapshot data it will display the following screen REPLAY SNAPSHOT DATA YES NO Press the key to replay the snapshot data PRINTING CAPTURED DATA In addition you can print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample A VP 411 printer is required to support this print function See Step 11 on page 120 To select Snapshot mode do the following The operation of SNAPSHOT mode is divided into three phases Set Up Steps 1 3 Data Capture Steps 4 7 and Data Display Steps 8 12 Set Up Phase 1 Press GJ to sele
217. k Neutral Position Position Pressure Purge Power Steering Pressure Power Steering Solenoid Vacuum Valve Power Steering Vacuum Switching Valve PS VSV Radiator Right Hand Revolutions Per Minute Standard Serial Communication interface Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Serial Data Link Sensor Solenoid Solenoid Purge Valve Speed System Temperature Throttle Body Fuel Injection Single Port Fuel Injection SPI Throttle Throttle Position Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Volume Air Flow Value Vehicle Identification Number Vent Vehicle Speed Sensor Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 82 ECM I Application Operator s Manual 1 SUZUKI ECM APPLICATION DESCRIPTION The Suzuki ECM Application is used with the tester to diagnose and troubleshoot the engine systems controlled by the Engine Control Module ECM and the Engine and Automatic Transmission systems controlled by Powertrain Control Module PCM that are used on Suzuki vehicles except OBD II vehicles that are for the North American market from 1996 to present The Suzuki ECM Application and the tester team up to become a diagnostic tool which is both powerful and easy to use With the Vetronix tester you can select test modes which let you read engine data parameters read diagnostic trouble codes clear diagnostic trouble codes diagnose intermittent problems by capturing and storing multiple samples of system data
218. kwards through the Data List SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F3 SNAPSHOT FUEL TANK LEVEL COOLANT TEMP DESIRED IDLE 80 40 C 104 F 797 RPM PNP SIGNAL INTAKE AIR TEMP CTP SWITCH P N RANGE 40 C 104 F ON 3 The currently displayed sample may be printed by pressing G If you are using a TECH 1 tester an RS232C I F Cartridge P N TK05030A is required The RS232C I F Cartridge is not required if you are using a TECH 1 Series A tester 4 You may return to the Select Mode menu at any time by pressing 69410 CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs which are different from the preassigned pairs Any two parameters can be displayed as a pair by simply scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed To fix the top parameter press af an asterisk will appear by the fixed parameter Press to fix the lower parameter The tester will not allow both the top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and IGNITION ADVANCE To do so scroll through the preassigned pairs with the and key until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED Fix the ENGINE SPEED by pressing the key if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter or the key if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or key until IGNITION ADVA
219. ld e Cycle power on the tester Cycle the vehicle s ignition and leave it in the ON position e Verify that the vehicle contains an ABS or AIRBAG system Check the connection to the DLC If this message persists you should check for a shorted serial data link or a faulty ABS or AIRBAG controller This can happen if power or ground is not available to the ABS or AIRBAG controller Refer to the ABS Diagnostic Circuit Check or AIRBAG Diagnostic System Check in the service manual Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 262 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT MODE v F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC HISTORY F2 DTC s Approximately 2 Seconds DTC 56 CURRENT LEFT FRONT ABS MOTOR CIRCUIT OPEN INDICATES CURRENT CODE INDICATES HISTORY CODE EXIT 4 Seconds DTC 61 HISTORY MOTOR CIRCUIT 5 EXIT OPEN 4 Seconds HISTORY DATA WILL BE LOST CLEAR DTC s CLEAR DTC s DTC s CLEARED EXIT FIGURE 5 2 Example of MODE F2 DTC Display and Clearing for ABS 4 Once data has been received the tester displays each code for 4 seconds You can freeze the display by pressing the key Pressing causes the tester to sequence to the next code Refer to the Service Manual for a description of the trouble codes 5 The DTCs are identified as either current or history codes Current Code A fault which is currently present in the vehicl
220. le s ignition is on Verify cable is plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector Turn tester and vehicle s ignition off Then turn ignition to on followed by turning on the tester and attempting to reestablish communications Some vehicle s fail to respond properly to tester queries for certain tests This is particularly true with oxygen sensor tests 1f all Readiness Tests have not been completed If possible drive the vehicle to complete the Readiness Tests and then rerun the tests PARAMETER UPDATE RATE IS SLOW Probable Cause Aslow update rate is characteristic of OBD II communications A typical update rate is approximately 125 to 150 ms per parameter 7 or 8 updates per second for a single parameter Therefore a typical list of 20 parameters will only be updated approximately every 3 seconds Recommendations Ifa faster update rate is needed select fewer parameters using the SEL USER DATA function Select only the parameters needed for a test For example you can look at just an oxygen sensor signal and get an update of 7 or 8 times a second Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 78 9 If You re Having A Problem II Application NOT ALL PARAMETERS ARE DISPLAYED Probable Cause The vehicle is not reporting all of the parameters The CARB MODE queries the vehicle s ECM to determine what parameters are supported by the ECM The tester then creates a Data List based on these parameters If the
221. lem by STORING ENGINE DATA PARAMETERS BEFORE AND OR AFTER THE PROBLEM OCCURS When the tester is operating in SNAPSHOT mode it is constantly storing information about data parameters A time and position index for the stored information is also saved The tester stores all of the Data List parameters for the vehicle selected When the memory is full the oldest earliest data collected is erased to make room for new information A TRIGGER tells the tester which data to save While operating the SNAPSHOT mode you can always cause the trigger to be set by pressing Once the trigger occurs the tester saves the data for review VIEWING CAPTURED DATA By selecting F3 REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT menu you have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data All data captured during SNAPSHOT will be Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 22 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application retained in the tester until it is overwritten by a new SNAPSHOT or if the tester is disconnected from the serial data link connector or the cigarette lighter for at least 24 hours PRINTING CAPTURED DATA The Snapshot data can be printed providing a hard copy of any selected data sample A VP 411 or compatible printer is required to support this print function See Step 11 SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F3 SNAPSHOT SET UP PHASE S
222. ll perform the gear tension relief sequence to allow you to remove it CAUTION Prior to removing the motor pack from the ABS hydraulic modulator prevailing motor torque or gear tension must be removed from the gear train to ease the motor pack separation process and prevent personal injury Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 280 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application Important NOTE For SE and SZ series vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system a battery adapter cable Suzuki P N 09932 56020 is necessary because power is not provided to the tester through the DLC when the ignition switch is off When testing be sure to disconnect the connector from the immobilizer controller and supply power to the tester by using a battery adapter cable To run the Motor Test do the following 1 Press to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See mportant on page 281 2 For 4WD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press to select the MOTOR Test 4 The tester display confirms that you are in the Automated ABS Motor Pack Diagnosis test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 5 The tester asks if the motor pack has been separated from the modulator Answer by pressing the or key If the answer is the tester instructs you to turn the ignition OFF If the answer is Qo the tester performs a gear t
223. meters until the tester is turned off so you won t have to re select them every time Engine Speed YES Select NO De Select Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 52 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application SNAPSHOT Setup The SNAPSHOT mode provides another way of looking at the diagnostic data in addition to the Data List of Current Data mode described previously In the SNAPSHOT mode data is saved in tester memory while the tester is waiting for a trigger condition The trigger can be A Manual Trigger via an 29 GD or G key press e An Code Trigger trigger on the occurrence of any DTC ASingle Code Trigger trigger on a DTC you specify SNAPSHOT MENU F0 Any Code F1 Single Code F2 Manual Trig SNAPSHOT MENU Y F3 Replay Data F4 Trig Point Selecting F0 Any Code or F2 Manual Trigger causes the tester to proceed directly to the DATA CAPTURE phase of the SNAPSHOT mode When the trigger condition F1 Single Code is selected the tester displays a code entry screen that allows you to enter the code desired Use the numeric keys to enter the desired Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC number then press the key to begin the Data Capture Phase The and keys can be used to move the cursor between numbers SNAPSHOT MODE Enter ECM Code To Trig On P Then Press Enter Trigger Point Setup Once the trigger occurs data continues to be saved in
224. mission VSS TRANS VSS A T KPH MPH km h The PCM controls the automatic gear changes of the automatic transmission by using these signals according to the signal from the Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS in the automatic transmission MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS ABS SWITCH ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the ABS operation signal which is input to the ECM or PCM from the ABS control module ON is displayed when the ABS is operating Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 164 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application OFF is displayed when the ABS is not operating This parameter is used for the engine speed control in the ECM or PCM A C CONDENSER FAN ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C Condenser Fan control signal A C CONTROL SIGNAL ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C Control Signals that is ON when outputting A C ON command and OFF when not outputting A C COOLING FAN ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the A C condenser control signal ON is indicating when the A C condenser is operating signal is outputting and OFF when the A C condenser is not operating signal is not outputting A C EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE DEGREES C DEGREES F This parameter is an analog input to the ECM or PCM from the A C evaporator thermistor and is used to prevent the A C evaporator from frosting or icing A C M
225. mp sensor circuit open SENSOR CKT MALF HIGH VOLTAGE 3 COOLANT TEMP Coolant temp sensor circuit short SENSOR CKT MALF LOW VOLTAGE 4 THROTTLE POS Throttle position sensor circuit open SENSOR CKT MALF HIGH VOLTAGE 4 THROTTLE POS Throttle position sensor circuit short SENSOR CKT MALF LOW VOLTAGE 12 NO CODES No Codes 13 OXYGEN SENSOR Oxygen sensor or circuit malfunction OR CIRCUIT FAIL 13 OXYGEN SENSOR Bl Bank 1 Oxygen Sensor or circuit malfunction OR CIRCUIT FAIL Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 142 7 DTCs ECM OBD 1 Application ECM TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR 13 BAROMETRIC PRES Barometric pressure sensor failure SENSOR CKT MALF HIGH VOLTAGE 13 BAROMETRIC PRES Barometric pressure sensor failure SENSOR CKT MALF LOW VOLTAGE 14 ECT SENSOR Engine coolant temperature sensor or circuit open OR CIRCUIT OPEN 14 NEEDLE MOVEMENT Needle movement sensor failure SENSOR MALF 14 NEEDLE MOVEMENT Needle movement sensor circuit open or short SENSOR CKT MALF 15 ECT SENSOR Engine coolant temperature sensor or circuit short OR CIRCUIT SHORT 16 SOI GOVERNING Actual start of injection deviates from the command by a certain amount for a given period of time 17 BATTERY VOLTAGE Battery supply voltage input is too high SENSING CKT MALF HIGH VOLTAGE 17 B
226. ms all of the functions described in this operator s manual General Tester Key Functions G Answer questions asked on tester display and select data parameters to monitor Return to previous step Scroll through test mode selection menus and control display of captured data Designate trouble codes Select and control test mode F6 On board function menu for details refer to the tester Operator s Manual G3 Print Data List parameters Enter designated trouble code and proceed to the next step Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 177 2 GETTING STARTED SETTING UP THE TESTER The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter or adapter cable for the vehicle being tested must be connected to the tester DLC Cable in order to connect the tester to the vehicle The following Vehicle Adapter Chart identifies which adapters and cables are required to connect each type of tester to the various Suzuki vehicles All adapters cables and any other hardware required to connect the tester to the vehicle are listed in the chart The figure number in the chart refers to the adapter and cable illustrations on the following pages SYSTEM TESTER ADAPTER DESCRIPTION Body System MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin P N 02001384 Figure 2 1 with 12 Pin 7 Connector Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin P N 02001969 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 2 Tech 1 None Figure 2 4 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page
227. n Page 25 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application 10 While in the data display phase pressing AUi will cause the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 16 Sample Time COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 3 4 The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 6 seconds means the sample was received 2 6 seconds before the trigger 11 The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer To print the data press GE The tester keyboard will be disabled while data is being sent to the printer SNAPSHOT data can also be printed in a tabular format using the Screen Print feature if the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed or if you are using a TECH 1 Series A tester Screen Print is enabled by pressing until an RS232 SET UP menu is displayed Press ai to enable the Screen Print function Refer to the RS232C I F or TECH 1 Series A Operator s Manual for more detail 12 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press 48 to return to the Snapshot Options menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press again to ret
228. n it ECM controls the injection start timing For ECU Number 40 Start of injection control is performed by calculating an optimal desired start of injection and closing the loop on it A control valve in the fuel pump is the actuation mechanism for controlling the start of injection THROTTLE ANGLE DEGREE The Throttle Angle parameter displays the throttle position related to the fully closed position 0 0 5 refers to a fully closed throttle while about 80 is a wide open throttle THROTTLE OPENER SOLENOID ON OFF The Throttle Opener Solenoid Vacuum Valve improves starting ability by opening the throttle valve slightly at the engine start When this signal is ON the solenoid valve turns ON to open the throttle valve Once the engine has started the solenoid valve turns OFF and the throttle valve closes completely after a programmed time THROTTLE POSITION UNITS This parameter displays the throttle opening rate THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR TP SENSOR VOLT The Throttle Position Sensor reading provides throttle valve opening information in the form of voltage This information is used for correction such as enrichment correction during acceleration The voltage reading should increase as the throttle is opened 0 V indicates a broken or shorted sensor TOTAL FUEL TRIM B1 BANK 1 LH BANK TOTAL FT B1 B2 BANK 2 RH BANK TOTAL FT B2 This parameter displays the total fuel trim correction applied to
229. n order to allow diagnostics to be performed The more hooks that are provided the more sophisticated the diagnostics which can be performed Some components might implement minimum diagnostics such as trouble code and diagnostic parameter readout Other components might implement high end diagnostics including provision for extensive control over the operation of the component and override of internal parameters This can be used to exercise specific circuits in order to assist in the isolation of faults Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 171 A C A T ACCEL ADV BTDC CAL CAM CANI CANIST CARB CKT CLUT CMP COHER COMM CON COND CONDENS CONT CONTR C GLOSSARY OF TERMS Air Conditioning Automatic Transmission Accelerator Advance Before Top Dead Center Centigrade Calibration Camshaft Canister Canister California Air Resource Board Circuit Clutch Camshaft Position Coherence Communication Control Condition Condenser Control Control CTP CTRL DEFIC DEG DIFF DLC DTC ECM ECT ECU EFI EGR EGRT ENG EVAP FCC FLT Closed Throttle Position Control Drive Deficient Degrees Difference Data Link Connector SDL connector Diagnostic Trouble Code Engine Control Module Engine Coolant Temperature Electronic Control Unit Electronic Fuel Injection Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust Gas Recirculation Tem
230. n select this mode from the TROUBLE INFO menu Freeze Frame Data Display For Vehicles with a Single Freeze Frame EURO Mode The Freeze Frame Data is displayed in the same format as the Data List Trouble Code format described in the DATA LIST of the Current Data mode The first Fo parameter in the list is the DTC which caused the Freeze Frame Data to be Engine Speed 1000 RPM saved Note that Freeze Frame Data is only available for the first DTC which was detected by the vehicle For Vehicles with Multiple Freeze Frames SUZUKI Mode The PXXXX numbers are the DTCs for each frame Once the Frame is F0 PXXXX selected the Data List is displayed F1 PXXXX 1st F2 PXXXX 2nd F3 PXXXX 3rd The or PCM has 4 frames where the Freeze Frame Data can be stored F0 displays the Freeze Frame Data of the malfunction which was detected first However the Freeze Frame Data in FO is updated according to the priority described below PRIORITY FREEZE FRAME DATA IN FRAME 1 1 Freeze Frame Data at initial detection of malfunction among misfire detected P0300 P0304 fuel system too lean P0171 and fuel system too rich P0172 2 Freeze Frame Data when a malfunction other than those in 1 above is detected In F1 through F3 the Freeze Frame Data of each malfunction is displayed in the order as the malfunction is detected These data are not updated F3 Clear Data To get to the Clear Codes Phas
231. nd check the serial data link connections An incorrect engine type selection may also cause this condition Display E This occurs when communication with a vehicle has failed after communication has already been established ACTIVE KEYS em Return to the vehicle select mode Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 18 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of the DATA LIST mode is to passively monitor data which is being transmitted from the ECM during normal operation of the vehicle This mode does not affect vehicle operation and you can use it to read data to see if it is correct or at least reasonable The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units This means you don t have to hunt through manuals to find out what is being displayed The data parameters are displayed in pre programmed pairs You can also create your own pairs through the process explained on the following pages To operate the Data List mode do the following 1 Press to select the DATA LIST mode from the Select Mode menu 2 order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time the tester displays data parameters in preassigned pairs The first data pair is displayed after you press af You can select the data parameters to be displayed by pressing the and keys Pressing scrolls forward through the Data List Pressing the key scrolls bac
232. nd of line 2 and the fuel pump state of operation ON OFF is displayed at the end of line If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press CAR to return to the Output Tests menu 7 Press CAR again to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Indicates Fuel Pump Control monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F FEL DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM ON Fuel Pump Control state Fuel Pump Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODE Select the FUEL PUMP CONTROL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen Turn on the Fuel Pump Turn off the Fuel Pump Terminate the Fuel Pump Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu MIL CONTROL The MIL Control mode allows you to turn the MIL on and off To select MIL Control in the Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the MIL Control test from the Output Tests selection menu or the Misc Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 134 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application 2 Set the parking brake and securely block the wheels of the vehicle 3 Press 19 9 to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that means ON and means OFF 5 Press to turn the MIL ON and to turn the MIL OFF Notice the letters MIL
233. nect the cable to the tester as shown in the preceding figures 6 Connect the DLC Adapter Cable to the vehicle DLC 7 Turn ignition switch ON 8 Verify that the tester displays the screen below SUZUKI MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE VX X lt ENTER gt 9 Press Gis to display the APPLICATIONS menu APPLICATIONS ECM OBD II 10 If Snapshot data has been stored when the tester is powered up ENTER PREVIOUS is displayed at the top of the screen lt ENTER gt PREVIOUS F3 ECM OBD II 11 Press GJ to select ECM OBD II from the APPLICATIONS menu If the display informs you that the companion application is missing contact your tester distributor If more than three applications are available use or to scroll the display 12 Verify that the tester displays the screen below SUZUKI ECM OBD Il ENTER If the display is not correct refer to Appendix 9 13 If the display is correct press 19 9 How to select the test modes is explained in Chapter 4 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 8 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED You should not remove or install mass storage or auxiliary cartridges while power is applied If you wish to change or add a cartridge disconnect the power plug install the cartridge then reconnect the power plug REMOVING OR CHANGING MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA SNAPSHOT data that has been captured c
234. ngine load ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE Engine coolant temperature sensor is a temperature variable resistor ECM receives the output signal to use various controls ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE DEGREES C DEGREES F Engine Coolant Temperature is an analog input to the ECM or PCM The Coolant Temperature sensor is a temperature variable resistor in series with a fixed resistor in the ECM or PCM and biased with a reference voltage The ECM or PCM reads the voltage across the Coolant Temperature sensor and converts this voltage into temperature ENGINE LOAD mg str Engine load value is calculated from throttle position and engine speed Load is referred to in terms of fuel quantity per stroke ENGINE SPEED RPM Engine speed is an ECM or PCM internal parameter It is computed by reference pulses from the Camshaft Position Sensor or Crankshaft Position Sensor and is used by virtually all ECM or PCM systems FUEL TEMPERATURE DEGREES C DEGREES F Fuel temperature is an internal ECM parameter and is installed on common rail This parameter controls fuel injection Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 151 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application VEHICLE SPEED VSS METER km h or KPH MPH Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS parameter is an ECM or PCM internal parameter It is computed by timing pulses coming from the vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed is used for the I
235. ns e Verify a good serial data link cable connection Cycle power to the tester COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING Most Likely Cause e BCM Application is not installed in the Application Cartridge Other Possible Causes Application Cartridge is not installed correctly Wrong cartridge is installed in the tester Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 233 A If You re Having a Problem BCM Application Recommendations Confirm that the Suzuki Application Cartridge is correctly installed in the bottom cartridge slot of the tester Confirm that no other Master or Mass Storage Cartridge is installed in the top cartridge slot Contact your tester distributor to have the application installed in the Application Cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 234 4WD A B A T ABS ATF CKT CNTL CON CONTR CVT DIFF DIFFEREN DLC DNS DRV ECU ECT ELEC EPS Four wheel drive Airbag Automatic Transmission Antilock Brake system Automatic Transmission Fluid Circuit Control Control Control Continuous Variable Transmission Differential Differential Data Link Connector SDL connector Diagnosis Driver Electronic Control Unit Engine Coolant Temperature Electrical Electrical Powersteering System B GLOSSARY FC ID IMMOBI in hg INI KPA LF LR MALF MON O D P T PCS PERF POS PRES PRESS PRE
236. nsor signal voltage VOLTAGE HIGH too high MAP sensor or circuit failure 31 MAP SENSOR Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor signal voltage VOLTAGE LOW too low MAP sensor or circuit failure 32 MAP SENSOR Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor signal voltage VOLTAGE LOW too low MAP sensor or circuit failure 32 MAP SENSOR Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor signal voltage VOLTAGE HIGH too high MAP sensor or circuit failure 32 GLOW PLUG Glow plug control monitor voltage high when FEEDBK CKT MALF control voltage should be low HIGH VOLTAGE 33 AIR FLOW SENSOR Volume Air Flow sensor voltage too high or too low VOLTAGE HIGH LOW MAF sensor or circuit failure 33 MAF SENSOR Mass Air Flow sensor voltage too high VOLTAGE HIGH MAF sensor or circuit failure 33 EGR 1 CIRCUIT EGR valve 1 circuit open MALFUNCTION OPEN CIRCUIT 33 EGR 1 CIRCUIT EGR valve 1 circuit short MALFUNCTION SHORT CIRCUIT 34 MAF SENSOR Mass Air Flow sensor voltage too low VOLTAGE LOW MAF sensor or circuit failure 34 SOI ACTUATOR SOI actuator circuit open CKT MALF OPEN CIRCUIT 34 SOI ACTUATOR SOI actuator circuit short CKT MALF SHORT CIRCUIT 36 EGR 2 CIRCUIT EGR valve 2 circuit open MALFUNCTION OPEN CIRCUIT 36 EGR 2 CIRCUIT EGR valve 2 circuit short MALFUNCTION SHORT CIRCUIT 37 A C CONTROL A C control relay circuit open RELAY CKT MALF OPEN CIRCUIT Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 144 7 DTCs ECM OBD 1 Application
237. o select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See Important on page 253 2 For AWD 3WSS type press G to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press a to select the LAMP Test 4 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Lamp test The display will automatically scroll after 4 seconds or when you press the key 5 A Select Lamp menu is displayed Press the key Ga GD that corresponds to the Lamp you want to test Figure 5 11 shows an example for the Red Brake Lamp Use the and keys to turn the Lamp ON and OFF or flash The commanded state of the Lamp is displayed on line 3 and depending on the Lamp the feedback state may be displayed on line 4 6 Press to return to the Select Lamp menu or press twice to return to the Select Test menu ACTIVE KEYS GO Select the Lamp you want to test from the Select Lamp menu Turn the selected Lamp ON Turn the selected Lamp OFF Return to the Select Lamp menu Press twice to return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 289 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT TEST F8 LAMP TEST F9 SYSTEM ID MANUAL CONTROL OF ABS LAMPS 4 Seconds or keypress SELECT LAMP F0 ABS WARN LP F1 RED BRAKE LP F2 ACTIVE LAMP RED BRAKE LIGHT A ON V OFF COMMAND OFF FEEDBACK OFF FIGURE 5 11 Lamp Test Example SUBMODE F9 SYSTEM ID This feature allows y
238. of a closed throttle position with engine spin above fuel cut speed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 153 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD I Application FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE ON OFF This parameter shows the state of the fuel pressure control valve installed on intake manifold to control fuel pressure FUEL PUMP ON OFF ON is displayed when the ECM or PCM activates the fuel pump via the fuel pump relay switch FUEL RAIL PRESSURE UNITS This parameter shows the fuel pressure at the fuel rail captured at the fuel temp sensor FUEL SYSTEM STATUS FUEL SYSTEM B1 FUEL SYSTEM B2 STATES OPEN CLOSED OPEN DRIVE CONDITION OPEN SYS FAULT CLOSED ONE 02S RESERVED Status of the air fuel ratio feedback loop is displayed as either an open or a closed loop Open indicates that the ECM ignores feedback from the exhaust oxygen sensor Closed indicates that the injection duration 1s corrected for oxygen sensor feedback FUEL TANK LEVEL The fuel tank level indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank The detectable range of the fuel level sensor is set as 0 to 100 however vehicles with smaller fuel tank capacity may have an indicated fuel level of only 70 when the fuel tank is full INJECTOR FLOW 1 INJECTOR FLOW 2 INJECTOR FLOW 3 INJECTOR FLOW 4 mm These parameters show the volume of fuel injected at the injector of each cylinder INJECTOR PULSE WIDTH INJECTOR PUL
239. on Command Control Controller Contacts A test where the TECHI controls some of the vehicle s functions Control Delphi Brake Control 7 Delco Chassis Division s ABS VI system TECHI operating mode where DLC diagnostic information is displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 306 B Glossary Of Terms ABS Airbag Application Data Parameter DCD Diagnostic Codes Discrete Parameter DLC DRIVER 36 VLR EBCM ECM ECU ESB FDBK or FB or FBK FREQ FRT Function Keys GND HYDRL ID IGN km h LF LR LT or LITE MPH MS MTR MV Numeric Keys P N Parameter PASS A parameter which represents a quantity and is displayed as a value with appropriate units volts C etc Delco Chassis Division Trouble codes Set by the ABS or SIR to indicate the occurrence of abnormal conditions A parameter which can be in one of only two possible states HIGH LOW ON OFF Data Link Connector Driver Side 36 Volt Loop Resistance Electronic Brake Control Module ABS controller Engine Control Module Electronic Control Unit Expansion Spring Brake Feedback Frequency Front Keys on the tester which can be used to select a particular function F0 F1 F9 These keys double as numeric keys 0 9 Ground potential low side of battery Hydraulic Identification Ignition Kilometers per hour Left Front Left Rear Light Miles per hour Milliseconds 1000ths of a second Motor
240. on PERF STUCK OFF commanded from TCM to A T 21 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift Solenoid No 1 open NO 1 OPEN 22 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift Solenoid No 1 short NO 1 SHORT 23 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift Solenoid No 2 open NO 2 OPEN 24 SHIFT SOLENOID Shift Solenoid No 2 short NO 2 SHORT 25 TCC SOLENOID OPEN TCC Solenoid open 26 TCC SOLENOID TCC Solenoid short SHORT 27 TORQUE REDUCTION Voltage at torque reduction signal circuit is low while torque CKT MALF reduction signal OFF is commanded 28 SHIFT SOL NO 2 Actual gear position ratio does not agree with gear position PERF STUCK OFF commanded from TCM to A T Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 214 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application TRANSMISSION TROUBLE CODES CONTINUED ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE 29 TCC SYSTEM TCC is not locked up while TCC solenoid ON is commanded PERF STUCK OFF Or TCC is locked up while TCC solenoid OFF is commanded 31 VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor signal not received by the TCM NO SIGNAL Vehicle Speed Sensor circuit failure 32 THROTTLE POS Throttle Position Signal too high SIGNAL HIGH Throttle Position Sensor or circuit failure 33 THROTTLE POS Throttle Position Signal too low SIGNAL LOW Throttle Position Sensor or circuit failure 34 TRANS RANGE Two transmission range signals or more fed to the TCM SWITCH FAIL Transmission range switch
241. on is used for calculating engine load and A C control RAIL PRESSURE REGULATOR This parameter shows the fuel pressure regulator opening cycle ratio RICH LEAN MONITOR RICH LEAN MONITOR B1 RICH LEAN MONITOR B2 B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK RICH LEAN This parameter tells whether the oxygen sensor voltage is above or below a programmed threshold The threshold is normally computed to be the oxygen sensor voltage corresponding to an intake air fuel ratio of 14 7 or about 450 mV An Oxygen sensor voltage reading above the threshold means the intake mixture is rich whereas an oxygen sensor voltage below the threshold corresponds to a lean mixture SHORT FT B1 B1 BANK 1 LH BANK SHORT FT B2 B2 BANK 2 RH BANK Bank 2 provides the air fuel ratio feedback correction value for Bank 1 It is the percentage of rich or lean correction being applied to correct injection duration Short fuel trim is based on rapidly switching exhaust oxygen sensor values A positive value indicates that fuel delivery is being increased to correct for a lean air fuel ratio A negative value indicates that fuel delivery is being decreased to correct for a rich air fuel ratio Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 157 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application START OF INJECTION UNITS For ECU Number 39 Start of injection control is performed by calculating an optimal desired start of injection and closing the loop o
242. on switch is not in ON position e Serial data link is shorted or open circuited ABS or AIRBAG is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that the tester is plugged securely into DLC Cycle power on the tester and then cycle the ignition e Verify that ignition is in ON position e Check for serial data link shorted or open Remove the cartridge and perform the tester Self test refer to the Operator s Manual NO COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE NO COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE CHECK DLC Most Likely Cause Tester cable has come loose from DLC Other Possible Causes gnition switch has been turned OFF Cable is not plugged securely into the tester Serial data link 1s shorted or open circuited ABS controller is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that ignition is in ON position Verify that the tester is plugged securely into DLC e Check for serial data link shorted or open Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 303 A If You re Having A Problem ABS Airbag Application KEYBOARD DISPLAY LOCKED OR PROGRAM RETURNS TO FIRST PAGE SUZUKI SUZUKI MASS STORAGE ABS AIRBAG 2 0 CARTRIDGE VX X FOR DELCO DELPHI ENTER ENTER Most Likely Cause DLC cable loose Other Possible Causes Master cartridge has loose or dirty contacts Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Cycle power to the te
243. onnect the power plug install the cartridge then reconnect the power plug REMOVING OR CHANGING MASTER CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA SNAPSHOT data that has been captured by a master cartridge can be printed on a VP 411 or compatible printer transferred to a computer for further analysis or displayed on a terminal The SNAPSHOT data will be retained within the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle However IF YOU POWER UP THE TESTER WITHOUT A MASTER CARTRIDGE OR WITH A DIFFERENT MASTER CARTRIDGE THE SNAPSHOT DATA WILL BE LOST Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 94 4 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve connected the tester to the vehicle and selected a language turn the key to the RUN position The next step is to select the communication mode Depending on the communication mode selected other information such as the vehicle type model and transmission type may be required SELECTING A COMMUNICATION MODE The Communication Mode display lists two options FO EURO MODE and F1 SUZUKI MODE The EURO MODE provides diagnosis of Suzuki vehicles equipped with emission related systems except for North American Market vehicles on and after 1996 model year using EURO OBD methods The SUZUKI MODE provides diagnostic functions and enhancements specific to Suzuki vehicles Press the key to the left of the communication mode you wish to use SELECT MODE F0 EURO MODE F1 SUZUKI
244. onnections An incorrect engine type selection may also cause this condition EXIT Return to the vehicle select mode MODE F0 DATA LIST For a description of the DATA LIST mode see Mode F0 Data List on page 5 19 MODE F1 PRINT DATA For a description of the PRINT DATA mode see Mode F1 Print Data on page 5 21 Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 63 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES MODE Trouble codes are set by the ECU when an abnormal condition is detected They are a key to diagnosing many of the problems which can occur in the vehicle The F2 mode allows you quick access to trouble codes for initial vehicle checks and to check that a repair procedure has been successful To operate the Trouble Codes mode do the following NOTE When checking and clearing trouble codes be sure to follow instructions in the Service Manual or correct reading or clearing of the DTC s may EH not occur Press to select the TROUBLE CODES mode from the Select Mode menu The Trouble Code menu appears TROUBLE CODE F0 DTC F1 PENDING DTC F2 FREEZE DATA TROUBLE CODE F3 CLEAR INFO F0 or F1 DTC or Pending DTC When you select F0 or F1 for or Pending DTCs the tester reads all DTCs which have been saved by the vehicle s controllers and then displays Atwo column list of all DTCs How many codes have been reporte
245. or B1041 DRV PRETEN INI Resistance of driver pretensioner initiator circuit is too high RES TOO HIGH 42 or B1042 DRV PRETEN INI Resistance of driver pretensioner initiator circuit is too low RES TOO LOW Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 219 7 Trouble Code Descriptions BCM Application AIRBAG TROUBLE CODES CONTINUED ECU TESTER DISPLAY TROUBLE TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTOR CODE 43 or B1043 DRV PRETEN INI Driver pretensioner initiator circuit short to ground SHORT TO GROUND 44 or B1044 DRV PRETEN INI Driver pretensioner initiator circuit short to battery SHORT TO BATTERY 45 or B1045 PSG PRETEN INI Resistance of passenger pretensioner initiator circuit is too high RES TOO HIGH 46 or B1046 PSG PRETEN INI Resistance of passenger pretensioner initiator circuit is too low RES TOO LOW 47 or B1047 PSG PRETEN INI Passenger pretensioner initiator circuit short to ground SHORT TO GROUND 48 or B1048 PSG PRETEN INI Passenger pretensioner initiator circuit short to battery SHORT TO BATTERY 51 or B1051 CRASH RECORDED SDM recorded crash condition B1053 A B MODULE DISPOSED Airbag module has already been arranged for disposition 61 or B1061 WARNING LAMP DEFECT A failure condition is detected in the warning lamp circuit 71 or B1071 SDM FAIL A failure condition is detected in the SDM Replace SDM Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 220
246. or the User Data List Parameters depending on which selection was last made since the tester was powered up The Data List will default to the All Data List Parameters mode when the tester is first powered up Depending on the vehicle the update rate of the All Data List Parameters mode can be four seconds or longer All Data list Parameters Selected Coolant Temp 40 C Intake Air Temp 25 C Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 51 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application Data List Setup The DATA LIST SETUP mode allows you to select the data you want to display You can select either All Data List Parameters or User Data List Parameters which allows you to monitor any combination of parameters from parameter to all parameters The update rate for the parameters is a function of the number of parameters selected A single parameter can be sampled as fast as 8 times per second DATA LIST SETUP FO All Data F1 User Data F2 Sel User Data If you select the Sel User Data in DATA LIST SETUP the tester will display a list of parameters from which to select 1 Select the desired parameters by scrolling through the list using the and keys and then pressing to select the parameter or to deselect it Engine Speed Selected YES Select NO De Select 2 When the parameters have been selected press 19 9 to go to the display mode The tester will remember the selected para
247. otice the letters A C displayed at the end of line 2 and the A C Condenser Fan state of operation ON OFF is displayed at the end of line 4 If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 136 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application 6 Press CA to return to the Output Tests menu Press C48 again to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Indicates A C Condenser Fan monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM OFF A C Condenser Fan state A C Condenser Fan Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR A C CONDENSER FAN CONTROL MODE Select the A C CONDENSER FAN CONTROL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen Turn on the A C Condenser Fan Turn off the A C Condenser Fan Terminate the A C Condenser Fan Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu ECU NO 39 ALL OUTPUT TESTS To select ECU No 39 All Output Tests in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the test you want from the Output Tests menu 2 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition to the ON position 3 Press to begin the test 4 The tester displays one of the following messages IN PROGRESS OR TEST OPERATING 5 Within about 10 seconds
248. ou to identify the ABS VI vehicle application the ABS version Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM manufacturer and calibration information without having to access or remove the EBCM NOTE The software ID is not related to a PROM version in the ABS controller The ABS controller has NO SERVICEABLE OR REMOVABLE PROM EH The ID and sequence number are for controller identification purposes only To access System ID do the following 1 Press to select Misc Tests from the Select mode menu See mportant on page 253 2 For 4WD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press to select the SYSTEM ID 4 The tester will display information about the Delco Chassis Division ABS controller on 3 screens Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 290 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application a System identification screen b Model year platform and ABS version number screen c Software identification screen This information may be referenced by service manuals or service bulletins It can be used to determine that the correct ABS controller is installed in the vehicle It may also be used for warranty purposes 5 The tester will continuously scroll through the 3 screens at 4 second intervals The display can be frozen by pressing the key and unfrozen by pressing the key 6 Press the key to return to the Select Test menu SELECT TEST F8 LAMP
249. ouble Codes Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes Codes may also be cleared with this mode Monitor Freeze Frame data stored in the ECU Mode F3 Snapshot Capture and store ECM data parameters Data is captured before and after a trigger point Triggers can be on any trouble code a particular trouble code or manual tester key press Captured data can then be displayed as well as trouble codes Mode F4 Miscellaneous Displays a submenu of Miscellaneous Test modes including Output Control tests and Readiness tests Mode F5 ECU ID Displays the ECU number and the software version Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 62 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application ECM COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS FOR THE SQ SERIES SY418 AND JA627 Most test modes display data Therefore these test modes require the ECM to send data to the tester When you select a test you may see one or more of the following ECM communications status displays POSSIBLE WRONG WAITING FOR DATA ECM SELECTED NO DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT Display A This means that the tester cannot yet display data as it has not yet received a complete data message from the ECM This display is sometimes seen right after selecting a test mode Display B This occurs when the tester has not received any data from the ECM In this case you should verify that the ignition is ON and check the serial data link c
250. ously captured data press F0 REPLAY DATA NOTE EB Single Code Trigger is not available on ABS DBC7 systems AR In addition to offering a trigger condition selection this cartridge offers the option of selecting a trigger point If you select F9 TRIG POINT from the SNAPSHOT OPTION menu the following options are displayed F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER and F2 END OF DATA NOTE EH Trigger Point is not available on ABS DBC7 system F0 BEGINNING The trigger will be at the beginning of the captured data After the trigger occurs the tester will continue to capture data until the memory is full then the data will be displayed If not enough Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 268 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application data samples have been collected to fill the tester memory because the qp key was pressed before the tester memory was full fewer than the maximum number of samples will be saved F1 CENTER A similar number of data samples that occurred before and after the trigger point are captured However if the trigger occurs at or near the start of the Data Capture phase there will be fewer samples before the trigger point is available for display Also if the key is pressed after the trigger occurs but before the tester memory is full fewer data samples captured after the trigger point will be available for display F2 END OF DATA Data that occurred before the trigger
251. ower to the tester Run the tester Self test Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 76 9 If You re Having A Problem II Application PARAMETERS FLASH ON OFF ENGINE SPEED 1500 RPM DESIRED IDLE 50 RPM Data List parameters flash on and off Most Likely Cause Serial data link cable loose or bad Other Possible Causes e Serial data link cable connector pins loose or corroded e ECM serial data link connector cable problems Intermittent ECM problem Recommendations Verify a good serial data link cable connection Cycle power to the tester TESTER IS NOT ABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE VEHICLE CHECK CABLE IGNITION ON DOES VEHICLE SUPPORT OBD II Possible Causes e Vehicle s ignition is off Diagnostic cable is not plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector Vehicle is not OBD II compatible Recommendations e Verify vehicle s ignition is on Verify cable is plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector Check underhood decal for OBD II certification Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 77 9 If You re Having A Problem ECM II Application TESTER STOPS COMMUNICATING WITH THE VEHICLE LOSS OF VEHICLE COMMUNICATIONS Possible Causes e Vehicle s ignition was turned off Diagnostic cable came loose from vehicle s diagnostic connector Vehicle failed to respond to query from tester Recommendations e Verify vehic
252. p or EF to position the on the display menu next to A C COND FAN then press GHG 2 Set the parking brake and block the wheels 3 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the A C COND FAN is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys A C is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the A C COND FAN is being controlled If the tester detects the following condition the A C COND FAN mode will be terminated Vehicle speed detected Idle SW OFF e Coolant temp gt 110 C A C FAN ON 4 To control the A C COND FAN off press the key To turn it on press the key 5 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the A C COND FAN control to the ECM Operation of the A C COND FAN Control mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 69 7 Operating The Test Modes For The SQ Series SY418 and JA627 ECM OBD II Application SELECT ACTUATOR FUEL PUMP CONT MIL CONTROL COND FAN ENTER SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER AIC FAN CONT Az ON OFF YES Indicates AIC FAN CONTROL CANIST VENT VAL XXX RN AIC TANK PRES VALVE ED XXX ON Indicates AIC FAN More Data Pairs state amp Scroll through
253. pecific Suzuki system be sure to reference the correct system application section in this manual Overall Vehicle Coverage YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1995 99 Esteem 1 6L I4 MFI 1991 94 Sidekick 1 6L I4 TBI 1992 98 Sidekick 1 6L I4 MFI 1996 98 Sidekick 1 8L I4 MFI 1992 94 Swift 1 0L I3 TBI 1996 99 Swift 1 0L I3 MFI 1995 99 Swift 1 3L I4 MFI 1999 Vitara 1 6L I4 2 0L I4 2 5L V6 1996 98 X 90 1 6L I4 MFI Table of Contents SUZUKI AFTERMARKET APPLICATION ECM OBD II APPLICATION 1 SUZUKI ECM II APPLICATION DESCRIPTION 1 VBHKLE COVERAGE c bspbebRRDIRERRERRERIET ERE TUA seers 2 DIAGNOSTIC MODES AVAILABLE _ 3 ade obs Seb qud pad EX Red Sad de 3 SUUR MOIS ARA DA HBADORAGT EROR GO ARR RE d 3 Diagnosis of the SQ Series SY418 4 7 627__ 3 2 GETTING STARTED 4 SETIING UP THE TESTER haw aG 4 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS seeker aad 9 REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE POWER IS APPLIED 9 REMOVING OR CHANGING MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGES CONTAINING SNAPSHOT DATA Geopabvbsbed eb TET SCENE Ee ES be E botes ad id 9 4 SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR COMMUNICATIONS amp TEST 10 SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR six Rx RR
254. peed sensor problems The status of the brake switch at the time of the fault Off or On This tells you if there was any brake application when the fault occurred Only the state of the brake switch is known the brake pedal may have simply been depressed or shorted without any vehicle deceleration N The second third and fourth pages of information about the last failure display the status of the brake telltale at the time of the fault ON or OFF and whether or not the brake had been depressed during this ignition cycle If the brake switch circuit was OPEN no brake input is seen Also many drivers do not depress the brake when starting the car but do prior to putting the car in gear If no brake input was seen prior to the fault and the brake switch circuit is OK this information tells you the fault was probably detected shortly after the ignition switch was turned on Also on the second third and fourth pages is whether or not the vehicle has been driven at a speed greater than 25 MPH during this ignition cycle and whether or not an ABS stop was in progress when the fault occurred This may point to a fault caused by additional stresses or vibration the vehicle encountered when in an ABS stop The fourth and fifth pages of information about the last failure display the code set and how many drive cycles since this code set DRIVE CYCLES A drive cycle occurs when the ignition is turned ON and the vehicle is driven
255. perature Engine Evaporative Emission Fahrenheit Federal Communications Commission Fault Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 172 C Glossary Of Terms ECM OBD 1 Application FREQ FRZ FT FUNC FXS GND IAC IAT IGN INJ INP INTERN ISC L min LEV LITT MAF MALF MANI MAP MC MFI MIL MISC mmHg MON MONIT MPH MPU mSEC MT Frequency Freeze Fuel Trim Function Fixed Spark Mode Grams Ground Idle Air Control Intake Air Temperature Ignition Injector Input Internal Idle Speed Control Kilometers Per Hour km h Liters Per Minute Level Little Mass Air Flow Malfunction Manifold Manifold Absolute Pressure Maximum Mixture Control Multiport Fuel Injection Malfunction Indicator Lamp Miscellaneous Millimeters of Mercury Monitor Monitor Miles Per Hour Micro Processing Unit Milliseconds Manual Transmission mV OBD O D 02S P N PCM PERF PNP POS PRESS PRG PS SV Valve PSP REF REG RL RPM RS232C SDL SEC SEN SENS SFI SOI SOL SOV SP valve SPEC SPD S W Millivolt On Board Diagnostic Overdrive Oxygen Sensor Park Neutral Powertrain Control Module ECM TCM Performance Park Neutral Position Position Pressure Purge Power Steering Solenoid Vacuum Valve Power Steering Vacuum Switching Valve PS VSV Power Steering Pressure Radiator Reference Reg
256. perature Engine Load Engine Speed Fuel Temperature Vehicle Speed VSS METER ELECTRICAL Battery Positive Voltage Battery Voltage Electric Load SPARK CONTROL Ignition Advance Ignition Timing Level Spark Advance Spark Advance Switch Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 148 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application FUEL DELIVERY Air Flow Barometric Pressure Barometric Sensor Voltage EGR Throttle Fuel Cut Fuel Pressure Control Valve Fuel Pump Fuel Rail Pressure Fuel System B1 B2 Fuel System Status Fuel Tank Level Injector Flow 1 2 3 4 Injector Pulse Width B1 B2 Intake Air Temperature Long Ft B1 B2 Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP Mass Air Flow MAS Mixture Control Dwell B1 B2 Mixture Control Learn B1 B2 Mixture Control Monitor B1 B2 Needle Sensor Voltage O2S Activation B1 B2 O2S BI SI O2S B1 S2 O2S B2 51 O2S B2 S2 O2S Signal Oxygen Sensor B2 Pedal Pos Sensor Rail Pressure Regulator Rich Lean Monitor B1 B2 Short Ft B1 B2 Start of Injection Throttle Angle Throttle Opener Solenoid Throttle Position Throttle Position Sensor Total Ft B1 B2 Total Fuel Trim TP Sensor Volt Turbo Pressure EMISSIONS amp DRIVEABILITY PARAMETERS Canister Purge Duty Canister Purge Solenoid Closed Throttle Position CTP Switch Desired Idle Speed EGR EGR Temperature EGR Valve EVAP Canist EVAP Purge Duty EVAP Solenoid Purge SP Valve
257. perform the test or if the test aborts after it starts confirm that none of the following conditions exists before starting the test again UE CONDITION CONTROL 1 5 9 11 13 17 RPM Control Engine Speed greater than 2000 RPM Vehicle speed detected 7 8 10 14 16 RPM Control Engine speed less than 500 RPM or greater than 2000 RPM Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 70 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 15 RPM Control CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF Vehicle speed detected Diagnostic trouble code No 24 is set 18 21 38 41 48 RPM Control CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 80 C 1 6 9 11 13 17 Fixed Spark Engine Speed greater than 2000 RPM Vehicle speed detected 7 8 10 14 16 Fixed Spark Engine Speed greater than 2000 RPM Coolant Temperature less than 70 C CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF 15 Fixed Spark Engine Speed greater than 2000 RPM 18 21 38 41 48 Fixed Spark CTP Switch Closed Throttle Position OFF DTC s detected Vehicle speed detected Coolant Temperature less than 80 C 1 4 9 11 IAC CAL Engine Speed greater than 2000 RPM 7 8 10 14 IAC CAL Coolant Temperature less than 70 C or greater than 105 C 15 IAC CAL Coolant Temperature less than 76 C A C Control Signal ON Power steering pressure switch ON Blower fan motor switch ON Transmiss
258. publication However the right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Using This Cartridge With A Tech 1 Or Tech 1A Tester The TECH 1A tester is an updated version of the TECH 1 tester In addition to already proven TECH 1 diagnostic power the TECH 1A has on board RS232 Instrumentation Port and DC Power Jack capabilities You can identify a TECH 1A by the phone style jacks on both sides of the tester Note that the TECH 1 and TECH 1A require a different DLC cable DC Power cable and vehicle adapters When using this manual to diagnose a vehicle take the time to determine the type of tester that you have and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters Doing so may prevent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis The hardware
259. r OFF by a signal from the TCM Gear position is decided by combination of ON or OFF TCC SOLENOID Off On TCC Solenoid is used for the TCC Control mode It is turned ON or OFF by a signal from the TCM TRANSMISSION RANGE P R N D 2 L FAIL Transmission Range is fed to the TCM from the transmission range switch This signal indicates when the gear is shifted to each range ABS GENERAL PARAMETERS RF WHEEL SPEED LF WHEEL SPEED RR WHEEL SPEED LR WHEEL SPEED KPH 0 285 MPH 0 177 Wheel speed is an ABS control module internal parameter It is computed by reference pulses from the Wheel Speed Sensor ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS BATTERY VOLTAGE Low High Battery Voltage is an analog input signal read by the ABS control module Certain ABS control module functions will be modified if the Battery Voltage falls below or rises above programmed thresholds FAIL SAFE RELAY ABS Volts This parameter indicates the voltage applied to the coil of the fail safe relay Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 226 8 Parameter Descriptions BCM Application G SENSOR G 2 50 7 32 The G Sensor converts Gs during the vehicle acceleration deceleration into a voltage signal and transmits it to the controller Based on this signal the controller judges the road surface conditions and controls the ABS while running in the 4WD mode PUMP MOTOR RELAY Volts This parameter indicates the voltage appli
260. r after selecting the type of vehicle you are testing the tester will display the Select Mode menu Detailed operating instructions for the various test modes listed on the menu are given in Chapter 5 of this manual ACTIVE KEYS amp Stop automatic menu scrolling then used to manually control the menu display Select a menu item amp Answer questions on the tester display Return to previous display Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 96 4 Selecting the Vehicle ECM OBD 1 Application APPLICABLE COMMUNICATION MODE OTHER THAN NORTH AMERICAN MARKET The following tables list the communication modes for specific ECU and model types X support blank no support For the details of ECU NO see Suzuki ECM Application Coverage on page 85 MODEL ECU NO SUZUKI MODE EURO MODE SE416 1 X 2 X 3 X 11 X 37 X SZ416 3 X SV420G 7 X 10 X SV620 7 X 10 X SQ416 420 15 X 24 X X 44 X SQ625 16 X 25 X X 43 X SF series 4 X 5 X 31 X X MF413 SF413 26 X SY413 415 416 5 X 13 18 X 29 X X SY418 8 X 14 X 36 X X SY419 20 X MB308 SB308 27 X SH410 6 X 9 X 30 X X MH410 SH410 27 X SR series 12 X MRD410 RD410 27 X Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 97 4 Selecting the Vehicle ECM OBD I Application MODEL CONT ECU NO SUZUKI MODE EURO MODE
261. r closed throttle position OFF 7 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu and return control of the IAC system to the ECM Operation of the IAC CAL function is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 31 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST Y RPM CONTROL FIXED SPARK lAC CAL ENTER CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS START ENGINE THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates IAC mode IAC FLOW DUTY XXX IAC ENGINE SPEED XXXX RPM CAL EXIT YES Indicates IAC calibration state More Data Pairs ACTIVE KEYS YES 5 croll throu isplayed data parameters Scroll through displayed data p lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units ENTER Advance to IAC Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral eturn to Miscellaneous Test menu EXIT R Miscell T Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 32 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application EGR SOL VALVE The purpose of the EGR SOL VALVE mode is to diagnose the EGR solenoid vacuum valve EGR vacuum regulator solenoid valve This mode allows you to control the EGR solenoid vacuum valve ON or OFF
262. reen will be displayed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 210 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application 9 When instructed remove your foot from the brake pedal and press to return to the Select Wheel menu If necessary repeat Step 6 Step 7 and Step 8 until all four wheels are checked 10 Press CAD to return to the Select Mode menu SELECT MODE Y F4 MISC TESTS MISC TEST F0 HYDRL CNTRL ABS HYDRAULIC CONTROL TEST 2 seconds STOP ENGINE LIFT UP VEHICLE TRANS IN NEUTRAL ENTER RELEASE PARKING BRAKE IGNITION ON ENTER SELECT WHEEL FO R F F2 RR F1 L F EXIT F3 L R DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL ENTER ENTER RIGHT FRONT START If wheel speed is detected TEST ENDED WHEEL SPEED DETECTED EXIT If a trouble code is detected TEST ENDED TROUBLE CODE S DETECTED EXIT 5 seconds or G keypress REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE PEDAL ENTER ENTER If battery voltage 10V or gt 16V TEST ENDED BATTERY VOLT TOO HIGH LOW Only for ECU No 15 Sumitomo Denko For ECU No 15 Sumitomo Denko and ECU No 27 Nisshinbo this screen reads as follows SELECT WHEEL F0 RIGHT FRONT F1 LEFT FRONT F2 REAR Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 211 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application
263. ries A tester the Print Data mode allows you to print the VIN engine type and Data List to a serial printer or terminal This is the data list sent by the engine computer to the tester The data list parameters can be printed without printing the VIN or engine type by pressing the G key in the Data List or Snapshot Replay mode To operate the Print Data mode do the following N A Nn Press GP to select the Print Data mode from the Select Mode menu The VIN entry screen is the first screen displayed in this mode Only the last 6 digits of the VIN are entered on this screen This information is then printed out as part of the header information that accompanies each data list print out The VIN is entered via the numeric portion of the key pad and the key is pressed to move to the next section of the print function The next screen requires the 1959 key to be pressed to start printing the data This screen allows the cable to be connected between the RS232C Cartridge and the receiving device When the Gas key is pressed the WAITING TO PRINT DATA screen is displayed until printing begins If this screen is displayed for more than a few seconds something is wrong with the set up Check that all connections are secure and that any receiving device is turned on and in the proper receive mode As printing begins the tester displays the COMPLETE of the print procedure After the printing is 100 complete
264. ring of data parameters in a manner identical to that of the DATA LIST mode To select IAC CAL mode of Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select IAC CAL from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Block the wheels set the parking brake and put the transmission in Park or Neutral 3 Make sure the vehicle is in Park with the parking brake engaged start the engine unless it is already running Warm the engine to operating temperature 4 Press 19 9 to begin the test 5 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the keys The letters IAC appearing at the end of line 2 of the display indicate that the IAC valve is being controlled At the end of line 4 of the display CAL Calibrated Air will be displayed If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu and return control of the IAC system to the ECM or PCM Indicates IAC CAL mode COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F IAC INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F CAL More Data Pairs Idle Air Control Calibration IAC CAL Mode Screen Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 127 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application ACTIVE KEYS FOR IAC CAL amp GI Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark
265. rket Application Page 146 8 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS The tester is capable of displaying a wide variety of ECM or PCM parameters in Data List Snapshot RPM Control and Output Test modes The ECM or PCM sends the tester information regarding the state of the engine and transmission as the ECM or PCM sees it The tester translates and displays this information in the form of parameters selected by the service technician This section describes those parameters There are two basic types of parameters discrete and analog Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of two distinct states on off open closed etc Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate units Examples of analog parameters include Engine Speed Coolant Temperature Oxygen Sensor Voltage etc Parameters are grouped by ECM or PCM function The categories are General and Electrical Fuel Delivery and Spark Control Emissions amp Driveability Transmission Miscellaneous CATEGORY DESCRIPTIONS General Parameters are those that effect or are affected by many different ECM or PCM systems Included are Engine Speed Vehicle Speed Engine Coolant Temperature and Charging Efficiency related parameters Electrical Parameters can be used to help diagnose vehicle electrical problems and include
266. roblems may occur that require special attention Some of these problems may be corrected with a few simple steps Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem If the problem appears to be in the tester perform the Self test described in the tester Operators Manual BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause Tester power supply is malfunctioning Other Possible Causes Faulty cable No power is applied to the tester Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 74 9 If You re Having A Problem II Application SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause Two application cartridges are installed Other Possible Causes Application Cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Make sure that only one application cartridge is installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try installing another mass storage cartridge MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Application Cartridge is not installed in
267. rol is effective at both idling and driving Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 161 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD I Application TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 4WD L SW ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the 4 wheel drive low gear switch ON indicates the Low or Neutral position and OFF indicates the 4WD high or 2WD high position This signal is used to prevent the gear change into Overdrive and TCC lockup GEAR POSITION 1st 2nd 3rd 4th INVALID 1st 2nd 3rd INVALID This parameter indicates the A T gear position which is computed on signals from the Transmission Range Switch VSS TP Sensor and so forth GEAR POSITION CON STATES This parameter indicates the A T gear position which is computed on signals from the Transmission Range Switch VSS TP Sensor and so forth GEAR POSITION MON 1st 2nd 3rd INVALID The monitor result of the A T gear position computed on shift solenoid 1 and 2 position is displayed INPUT SHAFT INP SHAFT SPEED RPM The Input Shaft parameter is a PCM internal parameter It is computed by reference pulses from the input shaft speed sensor and is used for torque reduction control in the PCM MODE SELECT SWITCH POWER NORMAL This parameter indicates the position of the Power Normal change switch and is used to select the automatic gear shift schedule Power or Normal mode O D OFF SWITCH ON OFF Th
268. rrence of a later fault The first page of information displays how often each of the first five faults have occurred The second page informs you how many drive cycles have occurred since the code was last set This information identifies intermittent fault conditions and the degree of intermittence If a fault occurred 1 out of 35 drive cycles an unusual condition may have occurred such as a severe pot hole that caused the fault In any case a fault this intermittent is going to be difficult to locate Up front you know special diagnosis techniques are needed to identify the cause If the fault occurred 10 out of 15 drive cycles your chances of identifying the fault are much greater and recreation 1s probably much easier Again you know Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 259 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application this before an attempt is made to identify the cause If the fault occurs every drive cycle the fault is easy to duplicate and diagnosis should be easier LAST FAILURE The last failure that occurred is identified specifically This fault is what brought the customer in for repair Additionally the following information identifies what was happening when the last fault occurred 1 The first page of information about the last failure indicates the speed the ABS controller believes the vehicle was going at the time the fault occurred An unreasonable number here may lead you to suspect wheel s
269. s Basic brake system other than ABS is in good condition Battery voltage is 11V or higher 2 Press G9 to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu 3 Press to select the Hydraulic Control test 4 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Hydraulic Control Test and waits for 2 seconds before instructing you to stop the engine raise the vehicle put the transmission in neutral Press I iz when these instructions are completed 5 Release the parking brake turn the ignition on and then press 19 9 6 Press Ga GE to select the wheel to test or press 1 to return to the Select Mode menu 7 Depress the brake pedal and then press Cui 8 The tester will display the wheel that you have selected to test Press to start the test and perform the following checks with the help of another person operational sound of the solenoid is heard and the wheel turns only about 0 5 sec brake force is depressurized Theoperational sound of the pump motor is heard and pulsation is felt at the brake pedal If a wheel speed is detected on two or more tires or if a trouble code is detected the test will end and a corresponding screen will be displayed NOTE Press to return to the Select Mode menu If neither of these conditions is detected the tester will count down from 5 seconds If the ABS unit is No 15 made by Sumitomo Denko and the battery voltage is 716V or 10V the test will end and a corresponding sc
270. s or to position the on the display menu next to EGR SOL CHK then press GU 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Misc Test menu 3 Set the parking brake and block the wheels Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys EGR is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check will be terminated Engine speed greater than 3000 RPM e Coolant temperature is below 80 C Vehicle speed detected Nn To control the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check off press the key To turn it on press the key 6 Press CAR to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check control to the ECM Operation of the EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve for system check mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 35 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Applicat
271. s If you hold either key down the tester sequences through all parameter pairs 4 Pressing the af key while in the Data List mode allows one sample of all data parameters to be printed if the tester is connected to a serial printer 5 If communication with the component being tested is lost the tester will inform you The tester will attempt to reestablish communications If the attempt is successful the tester returns to the Data List display If after five seconds there is still no communication the tester displays messages indicating the cause of the fault 6 Press to return to the Select Mode menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 255 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application More Data Parameters YES ACCELEROMETER 2 5V IDLE UP NOT ACTIVE SELECT MODE 4 y FRONT WHL SPEEDS F0 DATA LIST 55MPH 56 MPH F1 DTC HISTORY REAR WHL SPEEDS F2 DTC s 55MPH 56 MPH VEHICLE SPEED 55 MPH ABS WARNING LAMP OFF More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 1 Example of Data List Mode Operation for ABS For 4WD 3WSS Type CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs different from the preprogrammed pairs Any two parameters can be made into a pair New data pairs are created by simply scrolling either the top or bottom display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed Pressing causes the top display parameter to be fixed which is indicated with an
272. s already occurred DATA DISPLAY PHASE To Display data in Snapshot Mode do the following 8 The Data Display phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data to be displayed by using the and keys NOTE During the Data Display phase the trouble codes present during each EB sample can be displayed by pressing Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 206 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application Data Sample that occured just before the trigger occurred Trigger Position Data Sample that occured just after the trigger occurred More Data Samples before the trigger VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P N R 1 More Data Samples VEHICLE SPEED THROTTLE POS More 0 GEAR POSITION GEAR POSITION Bo P N R 0 P N R 0 e VEHICLE SPEED More Data Samples 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P N R 1 e More Data Samples after the trigger 9 Use the and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the tester display The trigger occurs between samples 0 and 1 Sample 0 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is the second sample preceding the trigger and so on The trouble code that caused the trigger can be viewed in sample 1 For ABS systems parameter data displayed in sample 1 is invalid The inde
273. s not recommended and is unsafe To select RPM Control Miscellaneous Test do the following 1 Select RPM CONTROL from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu The RPM CONTROL instruction screen is displayed followed by the BLOCK WHEELS screen 2 Block the wheels set the parking brake put the transmission in Park or Neutral then start the engine Warm the engine to operating temperature 3 Press to begin the test 4 The tester first automatically controls the engine speed to the current desired idle When the RPM Control Testing Screen is displayed you can increase the engine RPM by pressing the key To decrease the RPM press the key Holding down either key will cause the RPM to change in the appropriate direction Ifthe tester detects any ofthe conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed While in the RPM CONTROL mode parameters can be displayed as in the DATA LIST mode RPM appears at the end of line 2 of the display and the currently commanded value of RPM is displayed at the end of line 4 Data parameters can be scrolled and fixed as in the DATA LIST mode Indicates RPM being controlled COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F RPM DESIRED IDLE 760 RPM 760 RPM CONTROL value RPM Control Mode Screen 6 To return to the initial desired idle control RPM press the 19 9 key 7 Press
274. sensor signal O2S ACTIVATION O2S B1 ACTIVATION O2S B2 ACTIVATION O2S SIGNAL B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK ACTIVATION DEACTIVATION ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVATION is displayed when the oxygen sensor is operating within the activation temperature range and producing the expected output over a certain period of time The oxygen sensor is deactivated by the ECM or PCM and DEACTIVATION is displayed if it does not reach the activation temperature or if it does not produce an adequate reading over a certain period of time Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 156 8 Data List Parameter Descriptions ECM OBD 1 Application O2S O2S B1 51 OXYGEN SENSOR O2S 1 S2 OXYGEN SENSOR B1 O2S B2 51 OXYGEN SENSOR B2 O2S B2 52 B1 BANK1 LH BANK B2 BANK2 RH BANK mV V The Oxygen Sensor located in the exhaust stream is the primary input to the fuel delivery system A high voltage indicates a rich mixture while a low voltage indicates a lean mixture After the ECM or PCM is in the closed loop mode of operation the fuel mixture is adjusted based upon the voltage of this sensor If appears in the tester screen the vehicle being tested is not equipped with this sensor NOTE The oxygen sensor must be hot 7260 deg C 7500 deg F before it will function properly PEDAL POS SENSOR Pedal position TP sensor reading provides pedal position information in the form of voltage This informati
275. st Switch Tank Pressure Control Valve off while viewing parameters Gui Switch the Tank Pressure Control Valve on while viewing parameters ED EXIT Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 42 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application CANISTER PURGE VALVE The EVAP Canister Purge Valve mode allows you to control the canister purge valve open in xx increments from 0 to 99 6 while monitoring the EVAP Canister Purge Valve duty value To operate the Canister Purge Valve mode do the following 1 Press or to position the on the display menu next to CANI PURG VAL then press 333 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu 3 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition switch to ON 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EVAP Canister Purge Valve is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys PRG is displayed at the end of line two The current EVAP Canister Purge Valve duty ratio is displayed at the end of line four If the tester detects any of the following conditions the EVAP Canister Purge Valve mode will be terminated Engine speed detected Vehicle speed detected Pressing the
276. st Use the key to turn the relay OFF and the key to turn the relay back ON If the relay is commanded OFF the battery voltage should drop to below 5 0V within 2 seconds If it fails to do this the tester will inform you that the relay contacts appear to be closed Consult the service manual to make the necessary repairs 4 Press the key to return to the Select Test menu ACTIVE KEYS Select Relay test Turns relay ON Turns relay OFF Return to the Select Test menu SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TEST F1 PUMP MOTOR F2 RELAY TEST COMMANDED RELAY OFF A ON BATTERY y OFF XXXV FIGURE 5 14 Relay Test ABS DBC7 SUBMODE F3 AUTO BLEED The Auto Bleed procedure is used to provide a complete brake system bleed for the 3 channel ABS DBC7 system The Auto Bleed procedure cycles the system valves and runs the ABS TCS pump to purge air from all secondary circuits that are normally closed off during non ABS TCS mode operation and bleeding The Auto Bleed test should be used when it is suspected that air has been ingested into the system secondary circuits or when the ABS actuator assembly has been replaced with a new unit Refer to the Suzuki Service Manual for specific bleeding procedures Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 294 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application REFER TO VEHICLE SERVICE MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTION ENTER ENTER TEST
277. st if equipped with serial printer quipp EXIT Return to DATA LIST MENU or SNAPSHOT MENU Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 55 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F1 FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle s ECM saves diagnostic data information about the state of the vehicle when a Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC occurs This data is referred to as Freeze Frame Data and can be read by the tester using the FREEZE FRAME DATA mode You can select this mode from the SELECT MODE FUNCTIONS menu FREEZE FRAME DATA DISPLAY 1996 97 Vehicles and 1998 SV418 Vehicle The Freeze Frame Data is displayed in the same format as the Data List format described in the DATA LIST of the Current Data mode The first parameter in the list is the DTC which caused the Freeze Frame Data to be saved Note that Freeze Frame Data is only available for the first DTC which was detected by the vehicle Trouble Code P0130 Engine Speed 1000 RPM 1998 and Later Vehicles except 1998 SV418 Vehicle The PXXXX numbers are the DTCs for each frame Once the Frame is selected the Data List is displayed FO PXXXX F1 PXXXX 1st F2 PXXXX 2nd F3 PXXXX 3rd The ECM has 4 frames where the Freeze Frame Data can be stored FO displays the Freeze Frame Data of the malfunction which was detected first However the Freeze Frame Data in FO is updated according to the priority described below PRIORITY FREEZE FRA
278. st menu 3 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition switch to ON 4 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EVAP Canister Air Valve is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys VNT is displayed at the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the EVAP Canister Air Valve is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions the EVAP Canister Air Valve mode will be terminated Engine speed detected Vehicle speed detected 5 To control the EVAP Canister Air Valve off press the key To turn it on press the key 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the EVAP Canister Air Valve control to the ECM Operation of the EVAP Canister Air Valve mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 39 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST Ay CANI AIR VAL TANK PRES VAL CANI PURGE VAL ENTER ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED SET BRAKE STOP ENGINE IGNITION ON THEN PRESS ENTER Indicates CANISTER AIR VALVE mode ENTER CANIST AIR VAL XXX VNT TANK PRES VALVE XXX ON Indicates CANISTER AIR Mor
279. ster unplug and replug the DLC Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector Check DLC cable and connector for wear and corrosion COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING COMPANION APPLICATION MISSING Most Likely Cause ABS AIRBAG Application not installed in the Application Cartridge Other Possible Causes Application Cartridge is not installed correctly Wrong cartridge is installed in the tester Recommendations Confirm that the Suzuki Application Cartridge is correctly installed in the bottom cartridge slot of the tester Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 304 A If You re Having A Problem ABS Airbag Application Confirm that no other Master or Mass Storage Cartridge is installed in the top cartridge slot Contact your Vetronix distributor to have the application installed in the Application Cartridge Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 305 B GLOSSARY OF TERMS This section describes the abbreviations and terminology which are used in this manual and in the tester displays 36 VEN ABS ADS ADSMISS B BATT or BAT BCM BRK CAL CMD CNTRL CNTRLR CNTS or CNTCS Control Test CTL or CNTL DBC7 DCD ABS VI DATA LIST The Status of the 36 Volts Enable Antilock Brake System The Status of the Auxiliary Discriminating Sensor The Status of the Auxiliary Discriminating Sensor ADS Missing Battery voltage Battery Body Computer Module Brake Calibrati
280. t Application Page 120 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application Snapshot Mode Flow Chart SET UP PHASE See Steps 1 3 DATA CAPTURE PHASE See Steps 4 7 DATA DISPLAY PHASE See Steps 8 12 SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 ANY DTC Review previously F1 SINGLE DTC captured data F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA YES More Data Parameters SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER DTC TO TRIGGER ON XX THEN PRESS ENTER COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F FLASHING W WAITING FOR TRIGGER USE C AND SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS Ww COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F FLASHING T TRIGGER HAS OCCURRED T TECH 1 MEMORY FULL OR GME COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 0 TRIGGER POSITION BEFORE TRIGGER OCCURRED AFTER TRIGGER OCCURRED 0 YES Use and to view different Data Parameters OTHER DATA Se arent ene D display See Step 10 the current sample USE f AND TO SCROLL THROUGH SAMPLES Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 121 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application MODE F4 MISC TESTS MISC TESTS MODE ABORT CONDITIONS The following chart lists the vehicle conditions that will cause the Miscellaneous Tests to abort stop If you are unable to
281. tain data parameters that were present in the ECM when a DTC occurred Active DTCs are also displayed Mode F2 Trouble Code Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs that are stored in the ECM Mode F3 Clear Info Clears stored DTCs Freeze Frame data Oxygen Sensor test data On Board monitoring test pending DTCs results and resets the status of the system monitoring tests readiness test Mode F4 O2S Test Result Displays Oxygen Sensor O2S test results Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 50 6 Operating The Test Modes In Carb Mode ECM OBD II Application Mode FS Readiness Test Allows you to monitor the state of various on board tests which are performed by the ECU s Mode F6 On Board Test Pending DTCs Displays results of pending DTCs performed by the ECU s MODE F0 CURRENT DATA The Current Data function is used to display any or all of the vehicle parameters CURRENT DATA MENU When you select Current Data from the SELECT MODE Functions menu the Tester will display a CURRENT DATA Menu This menu allows you to either go directly to displaying data to go to the Data List Setup mode in order to select what data you want to display or to go to Snapshot CURRENT DATA FO Data List F1 Snapshot F2 Data Setup DATA LIST You can select Data List from the CURRENT DATA menu and monitor the vehicle parameters available from the ECM The Data List selection will display either All Data List Parameters
282. talling another master cartridge MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING MISSING CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Master cartridge is not installed Other Possible Causes Dirty contacts on the master cartridge connector Master cartridge is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that a master cartridge is installed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 301 A If You re Having A Problem ABS Airbag Application Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with methyl wood alcohol Try a different master cartridge WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED Most Likely Cause Wrong master cartridge is installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that the correct cartridge is installed in the bottom slot of the tester and that there isn t a master cartridge in the top slot Try another cartridge Remove the master cartridge and perform the tester Self test refer to the Operator s Manual NO DATA RECEIVED NO RESPONSE COMMUNICATION FAILED NO DATA RECEIVED FROM COMMUNICATION NO DATA RECEIVED EBCM WITH EBCM FROM SIR FAILED ECU NO RESPONSE Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 302 A If You re Having A Problem ABS Airbag Application Most Likely Cause Tester cable is not plugged securely into DLC Other Possible Causes Igniti
283. ter Is Not Receiving Data on page 232 EXIT Return to vehicle select step Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 193 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose ofthe DATA LIST mode is to passively monitor data which is being transmitted from the ECU during normal operation of the vehicle This mode does not affect vehicle operation and you can use it to read data to see if it is correct or at least reasonable The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units This means you don t have to hunt through manuals to find out what is being displayed The data parameters are displayed in preprogrammed pairs You can also create your own pairs through the process explained on the following pages To view the Data List do the following 1 Press to select DATA LIST mode from the Select Mode menu FOR ECU NO 2 MADE BY SUMITOMO DENKO When you are testing the ABS if a current trouble code is present when Data List 1s selected or if a current trouble code is detected while the Data List mode is active the tester displays the following message NOTE CURRENT TROUBLE CODE SET DATA NO LONGER VALID ENTER For the ABS current trouble codes cause the ABS control module to send invalid data to the tester Therefore data displayed in Data List Print Data and Snapshot modes is not valid and should not be used for diagnosing the vehicle To cl
284. the ABS this gives you the opportunity to examine more information which the ABS controller has saved about the ABS trouble codes Press if you do not want to clear the codes Pressing will cause ABS codes to be cleared Press 1 to return to the Select Mode menu For ABS DBC7 If you press the tester will display either DTC s CLEARED or DTC s NOT CLEARED 8b AIRBAG When the key is pressed the tester will display either DTC s CLEARED or a DTC s NOT CLEARED After a few seconds the tester will automatically display the Select Mode menu For SQ series tester displays NO CODE or trouble codes When the QY 9 key is pressed the Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 265 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application DTCs are retained in the AIRBAG controller and the tester will display the Select Mode menu For SQ series tester displays NO CODE or trouble codes 9 If the CODE CLEAR FAIL message is displayed reenter the DTC mode and try to clear codes again If it fails again then you probably have an intermittent connection to the DLC It is also possible that the controller is malfunctioning You can also try cycling the ignition ON OFF ACTIVE KEYS o Used to determine whether DTCs should be cleared or not Freeze the display of the latest DTC Display the next DTC Terminate DTC display Display EXECUTE CLEAR CODES AIRBAG only MODE F3 ABS S
285. the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application SELECT MODE SUB MENU 1 FO Data List F1 Print Data F2 Trouble Info F0 DTC F3 Clear Info F3 Snapshot F0 Any Code F1 Single Code F2 Manual Trig F3 Replay Data F4 Misc Test Double Relay A C Cut Off Pre Post Heat Relay Rad Fan High Rad Fan Low 3rd Piston Deactivator MIL Glow Indicator Lamp MLM mL ML RS KT KT mK KT KT OK OX Coolant Temp Warning Lamp Euro Mode SELECT MODE SUB MENU 1 FO Data List X F1 Print Data x F2 Trouble Info F0 DTC x F1 Pending DTC X F2 Freeze Data X F3 Clear Info x F4 Misc Test F1 Readiness Test x F5 ECU ID x ECM OR PCM COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DISPLAYS Most tester test modes display data Therefore these test modes require the ECM or PCM to send data to the tester When you select a test mode you may see one or more of the following ECM or PCM communications status displays Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 104 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application WRONG WAITING FOR DATA TURN KEY TO RUN ENGINE SYSTEM SELECTED EXIT amp RESELECT QT B Cc S POSSIBLE WRONG SERIAL DATA FAIL INITIALIZING ECM SELECTED NO CHECK DATA LINK OBD II DATA CHECK LINK AND RESELECT COMMUNICATIONS AND RESELECT EXIT NULLA D E F NORMAL PROCESS ECU BOSCH EC
286. the end of line two ON or OFF is displayed at the end of line four indicating that the Tank Pressure Control Valve is being controlled If the tester detects any of the following conditions the Tank Pressure Control Valve mode will be terminated Engine speed detected Vehicle speed detected 5 To control the Tank Pressure Control Valve off press the key To turn it on press the key 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu and return the Tank Pressure Control Valve control to the ECM Operation of the Tank Pressure Control Valve mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 41 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST CANI AIR VAL TANK PRES VAL CANI PURGE VAL AY ENTER ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED SET BRAKE STOP ENGINE IGNITION ON THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER Indicates TANK PRESSURE VALVE mode CANIST VENT VAL XXX VAL TANK PRES VALVE EXIT XXX ON YES o Indicates TANK PRESSURE More Data Pairs VALVE state ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters lt Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs F Toggle between English and Metric units ENTER Advance to Tank Pressure Control Valve te
287. the function key to the left of the test you wish to perform The tester will display test modes for the vehicle you have selected The following section contains a brief description of each test mode in the SUZUKI ECM Application A more detailed description of each test mode is given in the section discussing each test mode Mode F0 Data List Monitor engine and or automatic transmission data parameters from the ECM or PCM Mode F1 Print Data Send one data stream of information to a serial printer terminal or smart device Mode F2 DTC s Display and or clear stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes Mode F3 Snapshot Capture and store data parameters Data is captured before and after a trigger point Triggers can be on any DTC a particular DTC or manual tester key press Captured data can then be displayed as well as DTC s SUZUKI mode only Mode F4 Miscellaneous Tests Display sub modes to operate single tests Mode F5 ECU ID Display the ECU number and the software version Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 100 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application NOTE While the tester is connected to the serial data link connector and conversing with the ECM or PCM the ECM or PCM ignores input signals from the TEST switch and the DIAG switch in the vehicle service connector monitor coupler SELECTING TEST MODES The tester makes selecting the test mode easy by displa
288. the left of the system you wish to test SELECT SYSTEM Y F0 TRANSMISSION F1 ABS F2 AIRBAG TRANSMISSION When F0 Transmission is selected the Select Mode Menu is displayed ABS When F1 ABS is selected the ECU Manufacturer must be identified ECU MANUF AY FO SUMITOMO F1 NISSINBO Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 185 4 Selecting the Vehicle BCM Application The Select Mode Menu is then displayed AIRBAG When F2 Airbag is selected the ECU Manufacturer must be identified ECU MANUF Ay F0 SIEMENS F1 DENSO Next the following screen is displayed ALWAYS DO AIRBAG DIAG SYS CHECK IN S M AIRBAG SYS SECTION Y Perform the Airbag Diagnostic System Check as described in the Suzuki Service Manual then press to proceed to the Select Mode menu ACTIVE KEYS Select language Select system model Proceed to the Select Mode menu i Step automatic menu scrolling then used to manually control the menu display Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 186 4 Selecting the Vehicle BCM Application SUZUKI MASS STORAGE CARTRIDGE VX X ENTER ENTER APPLICATIONS AY F0 ECM F1 BCM F2 ABS AIRBAG SUZUKI BCM X X ENTER ENTER ENGLISH F1 HII F2 DEUTSCH FRANCAIS F4 ESPANOL AV Select language SELECT SYSTEM Ay F0 TRANSMISSION F1 ABS F2 AIRBAG
289. the motor pack from the ABS hydraulic modulator prevailing motor torque or gear tension must be removed from the gear train to ease the motor pack separation process and prevent personal injury and or gear train damage To run the Gear Tension Relief Test do the following Press to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu See Important on page 253 2 For 4WD 3WSS type press to select ABS from the Select System menu 3 Press GP to select the Gear Tension Relief Test 4 The tester will confirm that you are in the Gear Tension Relief test Consult the service manual for pretest preparations The display will automatically scroll after 4 seconds or after pressing the key 5 The tester will ask you to press the 1959 key to start the Gear Tension Relief sequence Press the key 6 The tester will inform you when the Gear Tension Relief sequence has been completed Press the key to scroll to the next page of instructions 7 To finish the test turn the ignition key OFF then follow the instructions on the next screen Press the 248 key after the motor pack is separated from the hydraulic modulator The tester will return to the Select Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 284 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT TEST F5 GEAR TEN REL F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD PREPARE ABS MODULATOR FOR OFF VEHICLE SERVICE 4 Seconds or
290. the results of the Oxygen Sensor testing performed by the vehicle s engine controller These tests are once per trip tests and are performed after the ignition is turned on under conditions defined by the vehicle manufacturer The F5 Readiness Tests mode indicates whether or not these tests have been completed If the tests have not been completed the tester will display a warning message to indicate that the test results may not be valid O2 Sensor Tests NOT Completed YES Continue NO Quit O2 SENSOR TEST MENU When the O2S Test Results mode is selected the tester checks the ECM to determine which Oxygen Sensors are present then displays a list of the sensors so you can select which sensor s test results to examine To select a sensor press the function key listed on the left If no sensors are detected the tester displays a warning message indicating that the O2S Tests may not be supported BANK 1 SENSOR FO SENSOR 1 F1 SENSOR 2 02S DATA DISPLAYS Once the sensor has been selected the tester determines which O2 Sensor data parameters are available for display It then displays data for each of the parameters Only parameters which are supported by the vehicle ECM are displayed R gt L Sw Time 0 16 Secs LR Sw Time 0 088 Secs amp Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed
291. timer During this portion of the test the brake pressure previously released 1s being held and your assistant should be able to spin the selected wheel This verifies that the ABS unit can HOLD the released pressure and checks for internal leaks The tester then commands the ABS modulator to APPLY APPLY is displayed on the screen Your assistant should not be able to spin the wheel selected at this point This test verifies that the ABS modulator can reapply brake pressure to the selected channel Refer to the vehicle s Service Manual for component servicing if a problem is found during this test 10 At the conclusion ofthe test the tester instructs you to take your foot off the brake pedal When the pedal is released the tester returns to the beginning of the Hydraulic test Run the test on another wheel or press to return to the Select Test menu When you exit from the Hydraulic Control test the tester will rehome the motors and display a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 277 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F2 HYDRL CNTRL F4 MOTOR TEST ABS HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONAL TEST RAISE WHEEL TO TESTED 4 If parking brake and or red telltale are on If 2WD 3WSS or 4WD 3WSS RELEASE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE PARKING BRAKE BEFORE If more than RUNNING THI
292. to STEP EGR then press GU 2 Press if the DTCs and Pending DTCs have been cleared If the DTCs have not been cleared press to return to the Misc Test menu 3 Set the parking brake block the wheels put the transmission in Park or Neutral then start the engine Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C 4 Press 19 9 to begin the test 5 The Data List display for monitoring the engine s response is available while the EGR valve is being controlled Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the keys The test begins with the STEPPING EGR at 0 EGR is displayed at the end of line 2 and Stepping EGR value is displayed at the end of line 4 To increase the Stepping EGR value press the key To decrease the Stepping EGR value press the key The STEPPING EGR value is displayed as a percentage If the tester detects any of the following conditions Stepping EGR Control will be terminated and the cause will be displayed Vehicle speed detected Engine speed greater than 3000 RPM e Coolant temperature falls below 80 6 Press to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu Operation of the STEPPING EGR Control mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 37 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST AV EGR SOL VAL STEP EGR EGR SOL CHk EN
293. to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and keys Fixed spark operation is indicated by the letters FXS in the lower right corner of the tester display as shown on the following page If the tester detects any of the following conditions Fixed Spark will be terminated Vehicle speed detected e Coolant temperature is below 80 C CTP switch or closed throttle position OFF 5 Press CAR to terminate the Fixed Spark mode and return to the Miscellaneous Tests menu Operation of the Fixed Spark mode is summarized in the following flow diagram Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 29 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MISC TEST Ay RPM CONTROL FIXED SPARK IAC CAL ENTER ARE DTCs amp PENDING DTCs CLEARED YES NO SET BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS START ENGINE THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP EXIT 40 C 104 F FXS More Data Pairs CLEAR DTCs amp PENDING DTCs BEFORE THIS TEST IS PERFORMED Indicates Fixed Spark mode ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed parameters Begin test Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between English and Metric units Return to Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 30 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode
294. top displayed parameter as fixed Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed Advance to IAC Control provided vehicle is in Park or Neutral Return to Miscellaneous Test menu EGR CONTROL The EGR Control mode allows you to continuously monitor Data List parameters while commanding the EGR control ON and OFF When EGR control is ON exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold The engine should be warmed to control operating temperature before performing the EGR Control mode test To select EGR Control mode in Miscellaneous Tests do the following Select the EGR Control mode from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu nS Block the wheels set the parking brake put the transmission in Park or Neutral and then start the engine Warm the engine to operating temperature Control the engine speed to 1500 4000 RPM then press zz Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the keys EGR is displayed at the end of line 2 and ON is displayed at the end of line 4 indicating that the EGR system is being controlled A Uu If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions tables the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed The test begins with the EGR on To control the EGR off press the key To control EGR on again press the key The Data List display for monitorin
295. ulator Rich Lean Revolutions Per Minute Standard Serial Communication interface Serial Data Link Seconds Sensor Sensor Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection Start of Injection Solenoid Shut Off Valve Solenoid Purge Valve Specification Speed Software Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 173 C Glossary Of Terms ECM OBD 1 Application SW Switch SYS System TBI Throttle Body Fuel Injection TCC Torque Converter Clutch TCM Transmission Control Module TEMP Temperature THROT Throttle TP Throttle Position TRANS Transmission TRIG Trigger TST Test UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Volts VAF Volume Air Flow VAL Valve VIM Vehicle Interface Module VIN Vehicle Identification Number VLV Valve VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor WID Width Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 174 BCM Application Operator s Manual 1 DESCRIPTION The Suzuki BCM Application is included in the Suzuki Application Cartridge and is used to diagnose and troubleshoot the Automatic Transmission A T Continuous Variable Transmission CVT Antilock Brake System ABS Electrical Power Steering EPS Airbag and Immobilizer systems used on the following models NORTH AMERICAN MARKET ECU ECU YEAR MODEL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER NO 95 00 ESTEEM 1600 SY416 4AT AISIN A W 1 ABS 4 CHAN
296. unction OFF scroll through selected samples YES Continue Manual Control test EXIT Return to the Select Test menu SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F2 HYDRL CNTRL MANUAL CONTROL OF ABS SOLENOIDS AND MOTORS 4 Seconds or keypress TURN ON TURN OFF YES TO CONTINUE SELECT FUNCTION Select LF APPLY Function LF RELEASE LF SOLENOID RF APPLY RF RELEASE RF SOLENOID REAR APPLY REAR RELEASE LF ABS MTR APPLY COMMAND 0 AMPS FEEDBACK 0 AMPS ABS RELAY ON ED USE THE GRAND O KEYS TO REVIEW MOTOR COMMAND amp FEEDBACK CURRENT 5 Seconds or keypress EXIT LF ABS MTR APPLY COMMAND 10 AMPS Trigger Position FEEDBACK 10 AMPS LF ABS MTR APPLY Data Sample that COMMAND 10 AMPS occurred just after FEEDBACK 10 AMPS the trigger RELAY ON 1 More Data Samples after the trigger FIGURE 5 8 Manual Control Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 276 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ABS Airbag Application SUBMODE F2 HYDRAULIC CONTROL CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or there will be unintended vehicle movement that could injure someone This test allows you to manually perform the APPLY HOLD and RELEASE ABS functions for brake system diagnosis To run the Hydraulic Control Test do the following 1 Press to select Misc Tests from the Select Mode menu Refer
297. urge valve ON and the key to turn the valve OFF If the tester detects any of the conditions listed on the Misc Tests Mode Abort Conditions table the test will be terminated and the cause will be displayed 6 Press CAR to return to the Output Tests menu 7 Press CR to return to the Miscellaneous Test menu Indicates Cani Purge Val monitor COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F PRG DESIRED IDLE 760 RP ON Cani Purge Val state Cani Purg Val Control Mode Screen ACTIVE KEYS FOR CANI PURGE VAL CONTROL MODE Select the CANI PURGE VAL Test and start the test Acknowledge instruction screen Turn on Cani Purge Valve Turn off Cani Purge Valve Terminate the Cani Purge Value Control test and return to the Output Control menu or the Miscellaneous Test menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 133 5 Selecting and Operating the Test Modes ECM OBD 1 Application FUEL PUMP CONT The Fuel Pump Control mode allows you to turn the fuel pump relay on and off To select Fuel Pump Control in Miscellaneous Tests do the following 1 Select the FUEL PUMP CONT Test from the Output Tests menu or the Misc Test menu 2 Set the parking brake stop the engine and turn the ignition to the on position 3 Press to begin the test 4 Press to acknowledge that means ON and means OFF 5 Press to turn the fuel pump on and to turn the fuel pump off Notice the letters FEL displayed at the e
298. urn to the select mode menu ACTIVE KEYS amp Scroll through displayed data parameters amp Scroll through selected samples G9 5 GD Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively Advance to first earliest sample Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample G9 Hold Hold Select RS232C SET UP menu Toggle between English and Metric units G3 Print current data sample if equipped with RS232C I F Cartridge or TECH 1 Series A and printer Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to Snapshot Options menu Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 26 5 Operating The Test Modes In Suzuki Mode ECM OBD II Application MODE F4 MISC TESTS RPM CONTROL RPM Control allows you to control the RPM If diagnosis of the IAC valve is required for any reason this mode allows quick and easy control of the RPM CAUTION This test should only be run with the PARKING BRAKE ON and the wheels adequately secured Any other mode of operation is not recommended and is unsafe To operate RPM Control do the following 1 Press or EF to position the on the display menu next to RPM Control then press GMAB Press if the DTCs have been cleared 2 Block the wheels set the parking brake put the transmission in Park or Neutral then start the engine Warm the engine to operating temperature at least 80 C
299. ve 0 means that the purge valve is completely closed while 100 is a fully open valve EVAP SOLENOID PURGE SP VALVE STATES ON OFF The EVAP Canister is used to trap gasoline vapors from the fuel tank When the EVAP Solenoid Purge Valve is ON gas fumes can flow from the canister to the intake manifold When the solenoid valve is OFF fumes are trapped in the canister IAC ADJUST MONITOR IAC flow must be adjusted to a specified standard when adjusting idle speed The IAC adjust monitor indicates the amount by which the current IAC flow is deviated from its standard value for idle adjustment This value is effective only in the idle adjust mode CAL MODE Therefore 0 indicated in any other mode than IAC CAL MODE is meaningless IAC DUTY The IAC Valve uses a duty solenoid valve It controls the engine idle speed by varying the valve open time within a certain set cycle and thus controls the amount of bypass air Idle Air Control Duty is obtained by using T on T x 100 IAC FLOW l min This parameter represents the quantity of the bypass air flow in liters per minute through the IAC valve IAC FLOW DUTY This parameter indicates the open or closed percentage of the IAC valve The IAC valve is driven by the stepping motor which is controlled by signals from the ECM 100 indicates that the valve is fully open and 0 indicates that it is completely closed Suzuki Aftermarket Application
300. vehicle contains a particular sensor but does not tell the tester that it supports that parameter e g a downstream oxygen sensor the tester will not display that parameter Acustom parameter list was defined in the Select User Data mode Recommendations Diagnosis must be performed based on other diagnostic data or procedures Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 79 A UNDERSTANDING SUZUKI ECMS The serial data link uses message oriented transmissions with a UART type data format The communication is via a single wire half duplex bus using a master slave protocol The serial data link can be used for communications during normal operation or as an interface to a test device for diagnostic operations If there is no requirement for data sharing between the vehicle s components during normal operation the link can be implemented as a diagnostics only link Numerous diagnostic modes provide a maximum of system flexibility Interface to the serial data link can be implemented using standard UART type devices communicating at a 10 4k baud rate The interface devices required for this phase are available as stand alone devices or integrated with CPUs or MPUs in a large number of micro controllers Network access is via a master slave protocol The serial data link can have at most one device functioning as the master at any point in time The tester controls all communications on the serial data link A slave device ECM can transmit d
301. x range may be less than the maximum number of samples if not enough time was allowed for data capture before or after the trigger You can advance directly to the first last or trigger sample with the press of a button F4 Display first earliest sample F5 Display trigger sample 0 F6 Display last most recent sample 10 While in the data display phase pressing AUi will cause the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time Suzuki Aftermarket Application Page 207 5 Selecting And Operating the Test Modes BCM Application VEHICLE SPEED 0 MPH GEAR POSITION P NIR 16 ENTER ENTER VEHICLE SPEED GEAR POSITION P N R 3 4 The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 6 seconds means the sample was received 2 6 seconds before the trigger 11 The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester connected to a compatible printer To print the data press GE The tester keyboard will be disabled while data is being sent to the printer SNAPSHOT data can also be printed in a tabular format using the Screen Print feature if the RS232C I F Cartridge is installed or if you are using a Tech 1A Series A tester Screen Print is enabled by pressing
302. ying a list of tests a test mode menu The menu also displays which key is used to select each test mode An example test mode menu is shown below To select a test mode simply press the tester key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu Since there are six test modes the keys GP are used The first three test modes are shown as soon as the model is selected The other test modes will automatically scroll onto the display after three seconds The display will automatically scroll between the two screens To stop the automatic scrolling press either the Or key The menu may then be manually changed by pressing either the or key All menus of more than three items scroll in this way Regardless of which test modes are displayed any test mode can be selected at any time from the menu Select Mode Menu SELECT MODE YA F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 DTC S SELECT VEHICLE _ to Data List gt to Print Data toDTC S 99 Snapshot gt to Misc Tests SELECT MODE P to Ecu ID F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MICS TESTs F5 ECU ID Not Available For All Vehicles Not Available for Euro Mode The Miscellaneous Tests mode is used to select a submenu of tests Pressing GJ displays the miscellaneous tests available To return to the Select Mode menu just press 22419 NOTE For the Diesel System only F4 MISC TESTS appears on the

Suzuki Master Book.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents